Asd Steel Manual Eng 2009 PDF

AutoCAD Structural Detailing - Steel - User’s Manual page: 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PROGRAM DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 6
1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROGRAM .............................................................................. 6
1.2. STAGES OF WORK ON STRUCTURE PROJECT DRAWINGS............................................................ 7
1.3. OPTIONS AVAILABLE IN THE MENU......................................................................................... 9
1.4. DIVIDE PROJECT (DISTRIBUTED WORK)................................................................................. 20
2. CONFIGURATION................................................................................................................. 21
2.1. PROJECT PREFERENCES........................................................................................................ 21
2.1.1. Project preferences..................................................................................................... 21
2.1.2. General ...................................................................................................................... 21
2.1.3. Materials.................................................................................................................... 22
2.1.4. Material database....................................................................................................... 23
2.1.5. Profiles....................................................................................................................... 24
2.1.6. Styles.......................................................................................................................... 24
2.1.7. Connectors ................................................................................................................. 25
2.1.8. Standards ................................................................................................................... 26
2.1.9. Project Info................................................................................................................. 26
2.2. PREFERENCES ..................................................................................................................... 27
2.2.1. Preferences................................................................................................................. 27
2.2.2. General settings.......................................................................................................... 28
2.2.3. Display settings .......................................................................................................... 28
2.2.4. Profiles....................................................................................................................... 29
2.2.5. Plates ......................................................................................................................... 30
2.2.6. Workframes ................................................................................................................ 30
2.2.7. Connections................................................................................................................ 31
2.2.8. Bolts and welds........................................................................................................... 32
3. OBJECT INSPECTOR............................................................................................................ 33
3.1. DESCRIPTION OF OBJECT INSPECTOR ................................................................................... 33
3.2. OBJECT INSPECTOR ............................................................................................................. 33
3.3. MODEL ............................................................................................................................... 35
3.4. PARTS EDITION ................................................................................................................... 36
3.5. POSITIONS .......................................................................................................................... 38
3.6. PRINTOUTS ......................................................................................................................... 40
3.7. TEMPLATES ........................................................................................................................ 40
3.8. STRUCTURAL DETAILING CENTER ....................................................................................... 41
3.9. ADD TEMPLATE................................................................................................................... 41
3.10. ADD VIEW ....................................................................................................................... 42
3.11. SELECT TEMPLATE .......................................................................................................... 43
3.12. TEMPLATES/VIEWS - STEPS TO BE FOLLOWED WHILE CREATING A PRINTOUT ...................... 44
3.13. DEFINITION OF FILTERS ................................................................................................... 45
3.14. HOW TO DEFINE A FILTER ................................................................................................ 47
3.15. OBJECTS AND THEIR PROPERTIES ...................................................................................... 47
4. TYPICAL STRUCTURES ...................................................................................................... 49
4.1. TYPICAL STRUCTURES ......................................................................................................... 49
5. WORKFRAME........................................................................................................................ 50
5.1. WORKFRAME ...................................................................................................................... 50
5.2. BOX ................................................................................................................................... 51
5.3. WEDGE ............................................................................................................................... 52
5.4. PRISM ................................................................................................................................. 53
5.5. LINES DISTRIBUTION ........................................................................................................... 54
5.6. LINES DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................. 55
5.7. EXAMPLE OF DEFINITION OF A WORKFRAME ......................................................................... 55
© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

page: 2 AutoCAD Structural Detailing - Steel - User’s Manual
6. PROFILES ............................................................................................................................... 57
6.1. PROFILES ............................................................................................................................ 57
6.2. BENT PROFILES ................................................................................................................... 59
6.3. EXAMPLE OF DEFINITION OF A USER-DEFINED SECTION ......................................................... 60
6.4. PROFILE LIST ...................................................................................................................... 61
7. PLATES ................................................................................................................................... 63
7.1. PLATES ............................................................................................................................... 63
7.2. PLATE DEFINITION............................................................................................................... 64
8. USER PARTS .......................................................................................................................... 65
8.1. USER PARTS ........................................................................................................................ 65
8.2. USER PART DATABASE......................................................................................................... 67
8.3. CREATING A NEW DATABASE ............................................................................................... 68
8.4. DEFINITION OF A NEW USER PART ........................................................................................ 68
9. GRATES .................................................................................................................................. 70
9.1. GRATES .............................................................................................................................. 70
10. MACHINING....................................................................................................................... 72
10.1. FIT TO LINE ..................................................................................................................... 72
10.2. FIT TO POLYLINE ............................................................................................................. 73
10.3. FIT TO OBJECT ................................................................................................................. 73
10.4. EXAMPLE OF THE FIT TO OBJECT OPERATION..................................................................... 76
10.5. OBJECT SNAP SETTINGS ................................................................................................... 77
10.6. CUT BY BISECTOR............................................................................................................ 78
10.7. CHAMFERING OF CORNERS - PLATES................................................................................. 80
10.8. EXAMPLE OF CHAMFERING PLATE CORNERS ..................................................................... 80
10.9. BENDING OF PLATES ........................................................................................................ 81
10.10. INSERT ARC - PROFILES .................................................................................................... 82
10.11. COPY CONNECTION.......................................................................................................... 82
10.12. COLLISION DETECTION .................................................................................................... 83
11. DRILLS/BOLTS/WELDS.................................................................................................... 84
11.1. DRILLS ........................................................................................................................... 84
11.2. BOLT SETTINGS ............................................................................................................... 85
11.3. PRINCIPLES OF CALCULATION OF THE BOLT LENGTH ......................................................... 86
11.4. WELD DEFINITION ........................................................................................................... 87
12. POSITIONING .................................................................................................................... 89
12.1. POSITION - DEFINITION AND DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 89
12.2. MANUAL POSITIONING ..................................................................................................... 90
12.3. AUTOMATIC POSITIONING ................................................................................................ 90
12.4. ADDITIONAL ................................................................................................................... 91
12.5. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 92
12.6. NUMBERING .................................................................................................................... 92
12.7. POSITION VERIFICATION .................................................................................................. 94
12.8. EXAMPLE OF POSITIONING AND AUTOMATIC PRINTOUT ..................................................... 95
13. FAMILY MANAGER.......................................................................................................... 97
13.1. FAMILY MANAGER .......................................................................................................... 97
13.2. EXAMPLE OF DEFINITION OF A PROFILE FAMILY ................................................................ 98
14. DIMENSIONING STYLES ................................................................................................. 99
14.1. DIMENSIONING STYLES .................................................................................................... 99
14.2. DEFINITION/MODIFICATION OF A DIMENSIONING STYLE ................................................... 100
14.3. DEFINITION/MODIFICATION OF A DIMENSIONING STYLE - DISPOSITION SCHEME ................ 101
14.4. ORIENTATION OF ELEMENT VIEWS AND DIMENSIONS IN A DRAWING................................. 103
14.5. GENERAL PART ............................................................................................................. 103

14.6. GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................... 105

14.7. CUT PARAMETERS ......................................................................................................... 105
14.8. DIMENSIONING OF CURVED PARTS.................................................................................. 106
14.9. DEVELOPED PARTS - OPTIONS ........................................................................................ 107
14.10. GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONS (SINGLE PART) .................................................................... 109
14.11. REFERENCE POINT ......................................................................................................... 110
14.12. GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONS (ASSEMBLY) ....................................................................... 111
14.13. GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONS (GROUP) ............................................................................. 113
14.14. GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONS (3D VIEW) .......................................................................... 113
14.15. ADDITIONAL TEXTS ....................................................................................................... 114
14.16. STYLES OF DESCRIPTIONS AND SYMBOLS ........................................................................ 114
15. DESCRIPTION STYLES .................................................................................................. 115
15.1. DESCRIPTION STYLES .................................................................................................... 115
15.2. STYLES OF DESCRIPTIONS - OPENINGS/BOLTS................................................................. 116
15.3. STYLES OF DESCRIPTIONS - PARTS/ASSEMBLIES ............................................................. 117
15.4. STYLES OF DESCRIPTIONS - ELEVATION MARKS .............................................................. 118
15.5. STYLES OF DESCRIPTIONS - WELD SYMBOLS ................................................................... 119
15.6. STYLES OF DESCRIPTIONS - WORKFRAME AXES .............................................................. 122
16. STEEL SUMMARY TABLES........................................................................................... 124
16.1. STEEL SUMMARY TABLES - STYLE MANAGER .................................................................. 124
16.2. DEFINITION/MODIFICATION OF STEEL SUMMARY TABLE STYLE ........................................ 125
16.3. COMPONENTS AND TABLE LAYOUT ................................................................................ 125
16.4. FONT, COLOR, LINE ....................................................................................................... 126
16.5. OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 126
16.6. SORTING AND DETAILED OPTIONS .................................................................................. 127
16.7. SYNTAX OF SUMMARY LINE ........................................................................................... 127
16.8. EXAMPLE OF GENERATING AND SETTING A TABLE STYLE................................................. 128
17. PRINTOUT ........................................................................................................................ 130
17.1. TABLE PRINTOUT MANAGER........................................................................................... 130
17.2. TABLE COMPOSITION ..................................................................................................... 132
17.3. PAGE SETUP .................................................................................................................. 133
17.4. FRAMES ........................................................................................................................ 133
17.5. DISTANCES ................................................................................................................... 134
17.6. COLORS AND FORMATS .................................................................................................. 134
17.7. HEADER ........................................................................................................................ 134
17.8. FOOTER ........................................................................................................................ 135
17.9. PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................ 135
17.10. TEMPLATES................................................................................................................... 137
17.11. LIST OF COMMANDS AVAILABLE IN THE PRINTOUT MODULE ............................................ 138
18. AUTOMATIC DRAWING GENERATION ..................................................................... 142
18.1. AUTOMATIC DRAWING GENERATION .............................................................................. 142
18.2. TEMPLATES................................................................................................................... 142
18.3. FORMATS AND SCALES .................................................................................................. 143
18.4. OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 144
18.5. BILL OF MATERIALS....................................................................................................... 145
18.6. EXAMPLE OF CREATING DRAWINGS (PRINTOUTS) ............................................................ 145
19. LINK WITH OTHER PROGRAMS ................................................................................. 148
19.1. AUTOCAD STRUCTURAL DETAILING - ROBOT LINK ..................................................... 148
19.2. DSTV IMPORT/EXPORT ................................................................................................. 150
19.3. DSTV NC PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 151
19.4. AUTOMATIC DRAWING GENERATION - SAVING TO PLOTTER ............................................. 152
20. APPENDIX - DESCRIPTION OF STEEL MACROS AVAILABLE IN AUTOCAD
STRUCTURAL DETAILING - STEEL ....................................................................................... 153

20.1. AUTOCAD STRUCTURAL DETAILING - STEEL - DESCRIPTION OF TYPICAL STRUCTURES

(MACROS).................................................................................................................................... 153
20.2. MULTISPAN FRAME ....................................................................................................... 154
20.2.1. Multispan Frame - Geometry .................................................................................... 154
20.2.2. Multispan Frame - Profiles ....................................................................................... 156
20.2.3. Example of 3D Frame Definition............................................................................... 157
20.3. ROOF TRUSS ................................................................................................................. 158
20.3.1. Roof Truss - Geometry .............................................................................................. 158
20.3.2. Roof Truss - Chords.................................................................................................. 160
20.3.3. Roof Truss - Verticals ............................................................................................... 161
20.3.4. Roof Truss - Diagonals ............................................................................................. 162
20.4. BRACING ...................................................................................................................... 164
20.4.1. Bracing Definition - Principles ................................................................................. 164
20.4.2. Bracing - Gusset Plates............................................................................................. 165
20.4.3. Bracing - Central Plate............................................................................................. 168
20.4.4. Bracing - Diagonals.................................................................................................. 169
20.4.5. Bracing - Bolts/Welds ............................................................................................... 172
20.4.6. Bracing - Angles ....................................................................................................... 173
20.4.7. Bracing - Tubes ........................................................................................................ 175
20.4.8. Bracing - Battens...................................................................................................... 176
20.4.9. Bracing - Offsets....................................................................................................... 178
20.4.10. Bracing - Strut ...................................................................................................... 179
20.4.11. Bracing - Rods / Turnbuckle.................................................................................. 181
20.4.12. Example of Frame Bracing Definition ................................................................... 183
20.5. STAIRS .......................................................................................................................... 184
20.5.1. Stairs - Geometry...................................................................................................... 184
20.5.2. Stairs - Step Distribution........................................................................................... 186
20.5.3. Stairs - Step Definition.............................................................................................. 187
20.5.4. Stairs - Landing ........................................................................................................ 189
20.6. SPIRAL STAIRS .............................................................................................................. 190
20.6.1. Spiral Stairs- General ............................................................................................... 190
20.6.2. Spiral Stairs - Steps................................................................................................... 192
20.6.3. Spiral Stairs - Base Plate .......................................................................................... 193
20.6.4. Spiral Stairs - Railing ............................................................................................... 193
20.7. STAIRCASE .................................................................................................................... 196
20.7.1. Staircase - General ................................................................................................... 196
20.7.2. Staircase - Steps ....................................................................................................... 197
20.7.3. Staircase - Grates ..................................................................................................... 198
20.7.4. Staircase - Staircase Landings and Flights of Stairs .................................................. 199
20.7.5. Staircase - Landing Properties.................................................................................. 200
20.7.6. Staircase - Properties of a Flight of Stairs................................................................. 201
20.8. RAILING........................................................................................................................ 202
20.8.1. Railing - Geometry ................................................................................................... 202
20.8.2. Railing - Profiles ...................................................................................................... 205
20.8.3. Railing - Details ....................................................................................................... 206
20.8.4. Railing - Rails........................................................................................................... 208
20.8.5. Railing - Intermediate Posts...................................................................................... 211
20.8.6. Railing - Fixing......................................................................................................... 212
20.8.7. Railing - Kick Plates ................................................................................................. 216
20.9. LADDERS ...................................................................................................................... 218
20.9.1. Ladders - Position..................................................................................................... 218
20.9.2. Ladders - Vertical Bars............................................................................................. 219
20.9.3. Ladders - Rungs........................................................................................................ 221
20.9.4. Ladders - Connections .............................................................................................. 223
20.9.5. Connection Properties .............................................................................................. 224
20.9.6. Example of Ladder Definition ................................................................................... 225
20.10. CAGES .......................................................................................................................... 228
20.10.1. Cages - Shape ....................................................................................................... 228
20.10.2. Cages - Details ..................................................................................................... 231
20.10.3. Cages - Exit .......................................................................................................... 233

20.10.4. Example of Cage Definition................................................................................... 235

20.11. COLUMN (PLATE GIRDER) ............................................................................................. 237
20.11.1. Column (Plate Girder) - Geometry ........................................................................ 237
20.11.2. Column (Plate Girder) - Parts............................................................................... 239
20.11.3. Column (Plate Girders) - Welds ............................................................................ 241
20.12. BEAM (PLATE GIRDER).................................................................................................. 242
20.12.1. Beam (Plate Girder) - Geometry/Parts .................................................................. 242
20.12.2. Beam (Plate Girder) - Welds ................................................................................. 244
20.12.3. Example of Plate Girder (Beam) Definition ........................................................... 245
20.13. MULTI-SEGMENT BEAM (PLATE GIRDER) ....................................................................... 246
20.13.1. Multisegment Beam - General ............................................................................... 246
20.13.2. Multisegment Beam - Segments ............................................................................. 248
20.13.3. Multisegment Beam - Segment Properties.............................................................. 250
20.13.4. Multisegment Beam - Geometry/Parts ................................................................... 250
20.13.5. Multisegment Beam - Welds .................................................................................. 252
20.13.6. Multisegment Beam - Parameters of Segment Contacts.......................................... 252
20.13.7. Multisegment Beam - Lap Splices and Openings.................................................... 253
20.13.8. Multisegment Beam - Bevels.................................................................................. 254
20.13.9. Multisegment Beam - Welds (Segment Contact) ..................................................... 255
20.14. COMPOUND PROFILE ..................................................................................................... 256
20.14.1. Compound Profile - Cross-section......................................................................... 256
20.14.2. Compound Profile - Battens .................................................................................. 258
20.14.3. Compound Profile - Welds .................................................................................... 260
20.15. SPECIAL PROFILE - CASTELLATED BEAM........................................................................ 261
20.15.1. Castellated Beam - Definition................................................................................ 261
20.16. BRACE .......................................................................................................................... 263
20.16.1. Brace - General .................................................................................................... 263
20.16.2. Brace - Connection to Girder ................................................................................ 264
20.16.3. Brace - Connection to Purlin................................................................................. 266
20.17. GRATE SPREADING ........................................................................................................ 267
20.17.1. Spreading of Grates - General............................................................................... 267
20.17.2. Spreading of Grates - Grate .................................................................................. 269
20.17.3. Spreading of Grates - Offsets................................................................................. 270
20.18. PURLIN SPREADING ....................................................................................................... 272
20.18.1. Distribution of Purlins .......................................................................................... 272
20.18.2. Distribution of Purlins - Brace Rod ....................................................................... 274
20.18.3. Distribution of Purlins - Brace Rod Properties ...................................................... 275
20.18.4. Distribution of Purlins - Dividing.......................................................................... 276
20.19. DEVELOPMENT PIPE ...................................................................................................... 277
20.19.1. Development Pipe ................................................................................................. 277

1. PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
1.1. General description of the program
AutoCAD © Structural Detailing is used to prepare detailed drawings of designed steel
structures. After completing the stage of architectonic structure design and generating a
structure calculation model (this stage comprises calculations and verification of structure
elements), the stage of preparing project technical documentation with required final drawings
takes place.
AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Steel is a program which allows generation of complete
detailing documentation of steel structures (drawings + tables of materials). The process of
creating drawings in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Steel is automatic. Drawings are
generated based on a 3D structure model using the options available in AutoCAD ©
Structural Detailing - Steel with the possibility to apply options available in the AutoCAD ©
program. In case a structure model is modified, it is possible to update automatically the
created documentation.
AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Steel is a program enabling generation of detailing
drawings; it is divided into a few parts which are responsible for:
1. link with the calculation program (ROBOT Millennium): data exchange, structure
recalculation, if needed
2. edition of a drawing or part of a drawing (projections, cuts, etc.) - including additional
drawing elements, correction of existing structure elements, adding structure element
dimensions
3. generation of final drawings
4. printout management.
AutoCAD © Structural Detailing combined with the ROBOT Millennium program allows the
user to make a complete structure project:
 generation of a structure model and structure calculations
 structure design
 generation of final drawings allowing edition of prepared drawings.
Basic tasks that are performed in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Steel after reading in a
structure model from the calculation program, include:
 possibility to define connections of structure elements
 posibility of elements’ machining (fitting to a line or object, chamfering)
 possibility to single out assemblies and groups in a structure model – according to the
actual procedure of structure assembly
 possibility to define user descriptions of parts
 possibility to obtain a drawing of a whole structure as well as to prepare the overall bill of
materials
 generation of detailed drawings.
The following objects have been distinguished in the program:

 Structure model, structure model elements - real (3D) structure elements; for them final
drawings are created
 Position - an object concerned with organization of structure model elements; a (letter –
digit) designation of identical parts or assemblies in a structure
 Document - a set of views of a position in determined projections and views (any number
of documents may be generated for each position); a document consists of views. NOTE:
A document may be edited only in the edition layout; a document may be printed only
after it is inserted to the printout layout
 (Document) template - a predefined set of views composing a logical whole (e.g. 3
projections of a given object); each document is created based on a template
determining which drawings (projections, sections) should be included in the document
 View - a single drawing; it is always a document component - if it has been added to a
printout, it is simultaneously a printout element. NOTE: only a view (drawing) contained
in a printout may be printed

 Printout - ready-to-use printout composed of views; its equivalent in the AutoCAD ©

program is a layout together with AutoCAD views provided on it; for each printout there is
exactly one layout corresponding to it.
The elements listed concern the stages of work on a project.
1.2. Stages of work on structure project drawings

The work concerned with creating documentation of a designed structure (drawings) may be
divided into the following stages:
1. Defining or loading a structure model
A structure model may be defined in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Steel; it is also
possible to prepare it in another program and open in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing -
Steel (see: AutoCAD Structural Detailing - ROBOT link)
A structure model - three-dimensional elements of a real 3D structure; for these elements
drawings will be prepared.
All operations are performed in the model layout. The model layout is an object of the
AutoCAD © program which is used to work with a structure model.
2. Assigning positions to structure elements

A position - an object concerned with organization of structure model elements; one or several
structure elements is/are assigned a position, for which a common set of drawings may be
generated.
It is available on two tabs of the Object inspector dialog box: Model and Parts Edition;
positions defined are presented on the Positions tab.
3. Defining documents
A document - a set of drawings for a position (for each position any number of documents may
be generated); a document consists of views (a document cannot be printed).

Documents are generated on the basis of templates, in other words, predefined sets of views
composing a logical whole (e.g. 3 projections of a given object); a template determines which
drawings (projections, sections) should be included in a document.
All operations are performed in edition layouts.

The edition layout is an object of the AutoCAD © program. Only one document may be active
at a time and only this document may be edited in the edition layout. Contents of the edition
layout should not be printed.
4. Defining (editing) views/projections

A view - a single drawing which always constitutes a document component; if it has been
added to a printout, then it is simultaneously a printout element - only a view (drawing)
contained in a printout may be printed.
Projections of assemblies are prepared on the basis of the coordinate system of the main part
(by default it is the longest part of an assembly). To modify projections, the user may either
rotate the view or, before drawings are generated, change the main part of the assembly
(using the command Change main part of group provided in the context menu of the Object
Inspector, on the Model tab).
Edition is performed in the edition layout.
5. Generating a printout
Printout - prepared, ready-to-use printout; it consists of views (for each Printout there is
exactly one layout corresponding to it).

All operations are performed in printout layouts.

The printout layout is an object of the AutoCAD © program. It is used for composition of a final
printout. For each printout layout there is one printout.
1.3. Options available in the menu

All the options available in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing are presented below (menu of
the steel part). The list includes: option position in the context menu, icon symbolizing the
option, command activating the option from the command line as well as short description of
the option.
Create workframe Opens the Workframe dialog box; the option allows application of a
workframe which makes definition of a structure model in 3D space easier.
Menu: Steel / Workframes / Create workframe command
Command line: RBCS_WF
Add node The option allows creating an additional node in the existing workframe.
Menu: Steel / Workframes / Add node command
Command line: RBCS_ADDNODE
Delete node The option allows deleting a node in the existing workframe.
Menu: Steel / Workframes / Delete node command
Command line: RBCS_WF_DELNODE
Add line The option allows creating an additional line in the existing workframe.
Menu: Steel / Workframes / Add line command
Command line: RBCS_WF_ADDLINE
Delete line The option allows deleting a line in the existing workframe.
Menu: Steel / Workframes / Delete line command
Command line: RBCS_WF_DELLINE

Profiles Opens the Profile dialog box; the option enables defining a bar of a selected
section.
Menu: Steel / Profile command
Command line: RBCS_PROFILE
Plates Opens the Plate dialog box; the option enables plate definition.
Menu: Steel / Plates command
Command line: RBCS_PLATE
Bent profiles Opens the Bent profile dialog box; the option enables defining a curvilinear
bar of selected profile.
Menu: Steel / Bent profiles command
Command line: RBCS_BENT
User parts Opens the User parts dialog box; the option enables defining (selecting)
user objects.
Menu: Steel / User parts command
Command line: RBCS_USERPART
Grates Opens the Grates dialog box; the option enables defining a grate of
specified dimensions and weight.
Menu: Steel / Grates command
Command line: RBCS_GRATE
Compound profiles Opens the Compound profiles dialog box; the option enables defining a
compound section bar.
Menu: Steel / Compound profiles command
Command line: RBCT_MMACRO
Castellated beam Opens the Special profiles - castellated beam dialog box; the option
enables defining a castellated beam.
Menu: Steel / Castellated beam command
Command line: RBCT_MMACRO
Cut by line The option enables cutting a part (profile, plate) so that it fits the plane
determined by a line.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Cut by line command
Command line: RBCS_CUTBYLINE
Fit to line The option enables trimming a given profile so that it fits the plane
determined by a line, perpendicular to UCS.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Fit to line command
Command line: RBCS_FITTOLINE
Fit to polyline The option enables trimming a given part so that it fits the broken plane
determined by a polyline, perpendicular to UCS.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Fit to polyline command
Command line: RBCS_FITTOPOLY
Fit to object Opens the Fit to object dialog box. The option enables trimming a given
part so that it fits another steel part.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Fit to object command
Command line: RBCS_FITOBJ
Cut by bisector Opens the Cut by bisector dialog box. The option enables trimming two
intersecing profiles so that they fit each other using a bisector of the angle
between their axes.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Cut by bisector command
Command line: RBCS_CUTBISEC

Lengthen The option allows the user to lengthen an existing profile along its axis.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Lengthen command
Command line: RBCS_LENGTHEN
Shorten The option allows the user to shorten an existing profile along its axis.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Shorten command
Command line: RBCS_SHORTEN
Bent plate The option enables bending an indicated plate.

Menu: Steel / Machining / Bent plate command
Command line: RBCS_BENTPLATE
Remove bending The option enables removing an existing bend from the indicated plate.
from plate Menu: Steel / Machining / Remove bending from plate command
Command line: RBCS_UNBENTPLATE
Split profile The option enables division of an existing profile into several independent
parts.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Split profile command
Command line: RBCS_SPLIT
Merge profiles The option enables connecting independent profiles into one profile.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Merge profiles command
Command line: RBCS_MERGE
Split plate The option enables division of an existing plate into several independent
parts. The user should indicate the plate and define a cutting line (the cutting
line can be defined as a line, polyline or arc). Moreover, a spacing between
parts of the split plate can be defined (the spacing is divided symmetrically
on both sides of the cutting line).
NOTE: If the cutting line intersects chamfers defined in the plate, then these
chamfers are removed from the plate. If the cutting line does not intersect
chamfers, then they remain in the split parts of the plate.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Split plate command
Command line: RBCS_SPLIT
Merge plates The option enables connecting two independent plates into one plate. To
connect two plates into one, the following conditions have to be satisfied:
- plates have to lie in one plane
- plates have to touch each other.
The result of merging plates is a plate (type: user) made of the material of
which the plate indicated first is made. All machinings of merged plates are
kept.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Merge plates command
Command line: RBCS_MERGE
Add plate vertex The option allows adding a vertex (or vertexes) in a polyline which defines
an indicated plate. Adding a new plate vertex changes the type of the plate
(to the user-defined plate).
Menu: Steel / Machining / Add plate vertex command
Command line: RBCS_ADDVERTEX
Remove plate The option allows removing a vertex (or vertexes) belonging to a polyline
vertex which defines an indicated plate. NOTE: removing a plate vertex is possible
only then, when after removing the vertex, the plate contour will be a closed
polyline (it means that, for example, it is impossible to remove a vertex from
a triangle-shaped plate).

Removing a new plate vertex changes the type of the plate (to the user-
defined plate).
Menu: Steel / Machining / Remove plate vertex command
Command line: RBCS_REMOVEVERTEX
Chamfer plate The option enables the operation of chamfering a plate corner. There are a
corner few types of chamfering available.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Chamfer plate corner command
Command line: RBCS_CHAMFCORN
Insert arc The option enables inserting an arc (bent profile) between two indicated
profiles.
After indicating two profiles, the following question appears in the command
line: ’Do you want to join profiles?’ Depending on the answer to this
quiestion, the resultant profile may be:
- NO: a composition of three profiles (two initial profiles and a bent profile)
- YES: one profile (three component profiles will be joined into one profile).
Menu: Steel / Machining / Insert arc command
Command line: RBCS_BENDCORNER
Drill/Bolt Opens the Drilling dialog box; the option enables definition of openings and
bolts.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Drill\Bolt command
Command line: RBCS_DRILL
Weld Opens the Welds dialog box; the option enables definition of welded
connections.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Weld command
Command line: RBCS_WELD
Multi-weld Opens the Welds dialog box; the option allows defining welded connections
for several elements simultaneously. Once several objects are selected
(profiles, plates), the program performs an analysis of the contact area for
the indicated elements. After selecting a weld type in the Welds dialog box,
welded connections of the indicated elements are generated.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Multi-weld command
Command line: RBCS_MWELD
Copy weld The option enables copying selected welds.

Menu: Steel / Machining / Copy weld command
Command line: RBCS_COPYWELD
Copy drills / bolts The option enables copying selected drills or bolts.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Copy drills/bolts command
Command line: RBCS_COPYDRILL
Adopt drills The option enables adopting all properties of a selected drill.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Adopt drills command
Command line: RBCS_TAKEDRILL
Insert bolts The option enables inserting a bolt into a selected drill.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Insert bolts command
Command line: RBCS_BOLTHOLES
Explode group of The option enables exploding a group of holes/bolts into basic objects of the
holes/bolts AutoCAD © program.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Explode group of holes/bolts command
Command line: RBCS_EXPLDRILL

Remove bolts The option enables removing bolts.

Menu: Steel / Machining / Remove bolts command
Command line: RBCS_REMBOLTS
Copy connection The option enables copying a selected connection.

Menu: Steel / Machining / Copy connection command
Command line: RBCS_CONNECTION
Update The option enables updating selected connections after modifications in

connections structure geometry; connections are adjusted to new structure dimensions;
the connection update mode depends on the option settings in the Project
preferences dialog box.
Menu: Steel / Machining / Update connections command
Command line: RBCS_CONNUPDATE
Connections The submenu and toolbar which enable automatic creation of different
connection types between indicated elements of steel structures.
Plate girders Submenu and toolbar which enable automatic definition of plate girders; in
the current program version definitions of a column, a beam and a multi-
segment beam are available.
Explode The option enables exploding some complex elements (groups, connections)
into single elements.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Explode command
Command line: RBCS_EXPLODE
Modify properties The option allows modifying parameters of selected objects; the program
opens the dialog box where the user may change parameter values for a
selected object.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Modify properties command
Command line: RBCS_PROPERTIES
Group The option allows the user to create groups of selected objects.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Group
Command line: RBCS_GROUP
Group assemblies The option allows the user to group assemblies based on the defined
connections.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Group assemblies command
Command line: RBCS_ASSEMBLY
Inquire
Object info Opens the ACAD text window; the option enables obtaining information
about the indicated object.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Inquire / Object info command
Command line: RBCS_INQ_ELEMENT
Group Opens the ACAD text window; the option enables obtaining information
about the group to which the indicated object belongs.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Inquire / Group command
Command line: RBCS_INQ_GROUP
Assembly Opens the ACAD text window; the option enables obtaining information
about the assembly to which the indicated object belongs.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Inquire / Assembly command
Command line: RBCS_INQ_ASSEMBLY

Center of gravity Opens the ACAD text window; the option enables calculating coordinates of
the gravity center for a structure or its selected part.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Inquire / Center of gravity command
Command line: RBCS_INQ_COG
Model size Opens the ACAD text window; the option enables calculation of dimensions
and weight of a structure or its selected part.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Inquire / Model size command
Command line: RBCS_INQ_MSIZE
Collision detection The option enables finding a collision of structure components (profiles,
plates, bolts, etc.).
The command line shows a number of detected collisions between structure
elements. It is possible to save collision tests; they are saved in the
‘RBCS_Collision_Detection’ layer and represented by AutoCAD® 3D Solid
objects.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Inquire / Collision detection command
Command line: RBCS_INQ_COLISION
Family manager Opens the Family manager dialog box; the option enables management of
steel element families.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Family manager command
Command line: RBCS_FAMILIES
Filters
Show current The option allows filtering objects in a drawing (only selected objects are
selection displayed). The filter is also accessible from the Object Inspector dialog
box.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Filters / Show current selection command
Command line: RBCT_SHOWCURSEL
Hide current The option allows filtering objects in a drawing (only unselected objects are
selection displayed). The filter is also accessible from the Object Inspector dialog
box.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Filters / Hide current selection command
Command line: RBCT_HIDECURSEL
Show all The option allows filtering objects in a drawing (all objects are displayed).
The filter is also accessible from the Object Inspector dialog box.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Filters / Show all command
Command line: RBCT_SHOWALLOBJ
Assign position Opens the Manual positioning dialog box; the option enables the user to
ascribe the position to a selected part.
Menu: Steel / Positions / Assign position command
Command line: RBCS_MANUALPOS
Run automatic Opens the Automatic positioning dialog box; the option enables the user to
positioning ascribe positions to structure elements automatically.
Menu: Steel / Positions / Run automatic positioning command
Command line: RBCS_AUTOPOS
Remove position The option allows the user to remove the ascribed position from a selected
part.
Menu: Steel / Positions / Remove position command
Command line: RBCS_REMPOS

Verify positions Opens the Position verification dialog box; the option enables the user to
run verification of selected positions.
Menu: Steel / Positions / Verify positions command
Command line: RBCS_VERIFYPOS
Parametric Submenu and toolbar with options enabling definition of typical elements of
structures steel structures.
Multi-bay frame The option allows definition of a parametric structure - a multi-bay frame.
Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Multi-bay frame command
Roof truss The option allows definition of a parametric structure – a roof truss.
Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Roof truss command
Bracing The option allows definition of a parametric structure – a bracing.

Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Bracing command
Brace The option allows definition of a parametric structure – a brace.

Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Brace command
Stairs The option allows definition of a parametric structure – stairs.

Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Stairs command
Stairs spiral The option allows definition of a parametric structure – spiral stairs.
Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Stairs spiral command
Staircase The option allows definition of a parametric structure – a staircase.

Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Staircase command
Railing The option allows definition of a parametric structure – the railing.

Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Railing command
Ladder The option allows definition of a parametric structure – the ladder.

Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Ladder command
Cage The option allows definition of a parametric structure – the cage.

Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Cage command
Purlin spreading The option allows defining a distribution of purlins.

Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Purlin spreading command
Grate spreading The option allows defining a distribution of grates.

Menu: Steel / Parametric structures / Grate spreading command
Change style Opens the Design styles dialog box; the option permits changing a design
style for a selected drawing.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Change style command
Command line: RBCS_CNGSTYLE
Adjust style Opens the Design styles dialog box; the option permits changing a design
style for a selected drawing.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Adjust style command
Command line: RBCS_ADJSTYLE
Edit view in full Selection of this option enables edition of a created drawing on the full
screen monitor screen.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Edit view in full screen command
Command line: RBCT_FULLSCREEN_ON

Full screen off Selection of this option switches off edition of a created drawing on the full
monitor screen.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Full screen off command
Command line: RBCT_ FULLSCREEN_OFF
Insert weld symbol The option enables the user to insert a weld symbol in a drawing.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Insert weld symbol command
Command line: RBCS_ADDWELD
Insert elevation The option enables the user to insert an elevation mark in a drawing.
mark Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Insert elevation mark command
Command line: RBCS_ADDELEV
Insert part label The option allows the user to insert description of parts in a drawing.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Insert part label command
Command line: RBCS_PARTLBL
Insert assembly The option allows the user to insert an assembly description in a drawing.
label Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Insert assembly label command
Command line: RBCS_ASLBL
Add view (detail) The option enables the user to create a new view (view of a section detail) in
a drawing.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Add view (detail) command
Command line: RBCS_ADDDETAILVIEW
Add cut The option enables the user to create a new view (view of a section) in a
drawing.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Add view (detail) command
Command line: RBCS_ADDCUT
Change view scale The option enables the user to change scale of a view (projection) in a
drawing.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Change view scale command
Command line: RBCS_CNGSCALE
Rotate view The option allows the user to rotate a view (projection) in a drawing.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Rotate view command
Command line: RBCS_ROTATEVIEWPORT
Shorten drawing The option allows the user to shorten a selected element in a drawing; the
option is useful in the case of long elements (in particular, for these element
segments which do not contain any snap points); the element shortening is
presented as a gap in the element subjected to shortening.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Shorten drawing command
Command line: RBCS_SHORTDRAW
Delete all The option allows the user to delete all the defined element shortenings in a
shortenings drawing.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Delete all shortenings command
Command line: RBCS_DELSHORTDRAW
Explode drawing The option enables the user to explode drawings into basic objects of the
AutoCAD © program.
Menu: Steel / Edit drawings / Explode drawing command
Command line: RBCS_EXPLODE
Drawing template The option enables the user to create and modify drawing templates.
designer Menu: Steel / Drawing template designer command
Command line: RBCS_ADDTEMPLATE

Dimensioning style Opens the Dimensioning styles dialog box used for determining the styles
of dimensioning for elements provided in a drawing.
Menu: Steel / Styles / Dimensioning styles command
Command line: RBCS_DIM
Description styles Opens the Styles of descriptions dialog box which is used to determine
styles of descriptions for elements provided in a drawing.
Menu: Steel / Styles / Description styles command
Command line: RBCS_DESCRIPTION
Automatic The option enables the user to generate automatic printouts (one part is
printouts presented in one drawing).
Menu: Steel / Automatic printouts command
Command line: RBCS_AUTOPRINT
Add printout The option enables adding a new printout; the program generates a new
layout of the specified name.
Delete printout The option enables deleting an indicated printout.
Save printout as The option enables saving a printout as a drawing *.dwg-format file.
DWG
Scheme of element The option allows the user to define a group of structure elements used to
disposition prepare a scheme of a structure model. For a defined scheme the program
generates drawings in which structure elements are represented in a
simplified way.
Menu: Steel / Scheme of element disposition command
Command line: RBCS_ADDSCHEME
Bill of materials The option allows the user to prepare tables of all structure elements.
Menu: Steel / Reports / Bill of materials command
Command line: RBCS_BILL
List of profiles The option allows the user to prepare tables of profiles.
Menu: Steel / Reports / List of profiles command
Command line: RBCS_PROFILELIST
List of plates The option allows the user to prepare tables of plates.
Menu: Steel / Reports / List of plates command
Command line: RBCS_PLATELIST
List of user parts The option allows the user to prepare tables of user parts.
Menu: Steel / Reports / List of user parts command
Command line: _RBCS_USEROBJLIST
List of assemblies The option allows the user to prepare assembly tables.
Menu: Steel / Reports / List of assemblies command
Command line: RBCS_ALIST
Mounting list The option allows the user to prepare mounting tables.
Menu: Steel / Reports / Mounting list command
Command line: RBCS_MONTLIST
Bolt list The option allows the user to prepare connector tables.
Menu: Steel / Reports / Bolt list command
Command line: RBCS_BLIST

Update table The option allows the user to update a table presented in a drawing.
Menu: Steel / Reports / Update table command
Command line: RBCS_ACTTABLE
Printout Opens the Table printout manager dialog box; the option enables the user
to define/modify appearance of the printout of tables used to prepare steel
summary tables.
Menu: Steel / Reports / Printout command
Command line: RBCS_LISTPRINT
Styles Opens the Steel summary tables - style manager dialog box; the option
enables the user to define/modify tables used to prepare steel summary
tables.
Menu: Steel / Reports / Styles command
Command line: RBCS_LISTTEMPL
Workspace
Show / Hide The option enables switching on / off presentation of the Object inspector
inspector dialog dialog box located by standard in the left part of the screen.
box Menu: Steel / Tools / Workspace / Show/hide inspector dialog box
command
Command line: RBCTOI
Object snap Opens the Object snap settings dialog box; the option allows the user to
settings set active snap points for steel profiles.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Workspace / Object snap settings command
Command line: RBCS_PSNAP
Lock X direction The option enables switching on / off locking of the local X axis of a bar
section; if this option is switched on, then the bar may be lengthened only
along the bar axis; if this option is switched off, then a profile may be
lengthened in any direction.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Workspace / Lock X direction command
Command line: RBCS_LOCKX
Select assembly The option enables indicating a part of an assembly; the entire assembly to
which this part belongs becomes selected.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Workspace / Select assembly command
Command line: RBCS_SELASSEMBLY
Dynamic UCS The option allows the user to adjust the view plane and active UCS to UCS
of a selected object.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Workspace / Dynamic UCS command
Command line: RBCS_DYNUCS
Elevation mark - The option allows the user to insert an elevation mark in the selected plane
model and at the indicated point in a drawing.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Workspace / Elevation mark - model command
Command line: RBCS_MELEV
Clipping plane on The option switches on limitation of a structure view with two planes.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Workspace / Clipping plane on command
Command line: RBCS_CLIPON
Clipping plane off The option switches off limitation of a structure view with two planes.
Menu: Steel / Tools / Workspace / Clipping plane off command
Command line: RBCS_CLIPOFF

User-defined The option allows defining a profile and saving it either to the profile
sections database or locally in a project.
Menu: Steel / Tools / User-defined sections command
Command line: RBCS_USRPROFILE
Static analysis - Option allows export of a structure model to the calculation program ROBOT
ROBOT Millennium Millennium.
Menu: Steel / Static analysis - ROBOT Millennium command
Command line: RBCS_R2R
Analysis Interface – The option enables importing a whole 3D structure model from the current
quick model import project in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing to the currently opened project
in the ROBOT program (NOTE: both programs must be opened); a
temporary link is created.
Command line: RBCS_R2I
Analysis Interface – The option enables exporting a 3D structure model from the current project
quick model export in the ROBOT program to the currently opened project in AutoCAD ©
Structural Detailing (NOTE: both programs must be opened); a temporary
link is created.
Command line: RBCS_R2O
DSTV data export The option enables reading / saving a DSTV format file.
Menu: Steel / DSTV data export command
Command line: RBCS_DSTV
Save model as The option enables saving a structure model to a DWG format file (ACIS
ACIS solids format).
Menu: Steel / Save model as ACIS solids command
Command line: RBCS_EXPORTMODEL
Preferences Opens the Options dialog box; the option enables the user to set
parameters of the work environment for AutoCAD © Structural Detailing.
Menu: Steel / Preferences command
Command line: RBCS_PREF
Project preferences Opens the Project preferences dialog box; the option enables the user to
adopt basic parameters of the current project in AutoCAD © Structural
Detailing.
Menu: Steel / Project preferences command
Command line: RBCS_PRJPREF
Check for updates The option, which when run, opens the Internet page of the software
producer or dealer; from this page the user will be able to download program
updates (Maintenance Pack, information about a new version, etc.).
Menu: Steel / Check for updates command
Command line: RBCT_UPDATESERVICE
Divide project The option enables dividing a project into several parts (distributed work on a
document); it allows decreasing the size of a file with project data.
Menu: Steel / Divide project command
Command line: RBCT_DISTRIBUTE

1.4. Divide project (distributed work)

The option enables the user to divide a file with structure model into smaller files. The option is
available from:
 menu by pressing the Steel / Divide project option
 toolbar by pressing the icon
 command line: RBCT_DISTRIBUTE
 when running automatic drawings - by switching on the Start distributed work option.
The option creates automatically a subfolder, where in separate *.dwg files information about
positions is saved. Thanks to this operation the main *.dwg file is smaller (e.g. loading such a
file takes up much less time than loading one file with information about all structure
elements).
NOTE:
If the user has already divided a *.dwg file (has started distributed work on the project), there
is no possibility to return to one large *.dwg file containing information about all structure
elements.
To start distributed work, the user needs:

 a model with already defined positions
 to select the Steel / Divide project option or press the icon
 to select positions to be saved to external files
 to press the Enter key.
Once a project is divided, successive positions / drawings added to a project are saved in
separate files (the Divide project option works for new positions / drawings); the main
project file will not be too large, since most information will be saved in separate *.dwg files.
NOTE:
If the user would like to copy a created project in which distributed work has begun, then apart
from the main *.dwg file, he/she has to copy the subfolder with separate *.dwg files containing
descriptions of individual positions / drawings.

2. CONFIGURATION
2.1. Project preferences
2.1.1. Project preferences
The option allows the user to adopt basic parameters applied in AutoCAD © Structural
Detailing (these parameters are saved in a DWG file). The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Project preferences option
 the toolbar by pressing the icon
 the command line: RBCS_PRJPREF.
Two main parts may be distinguished in the Project preferences dialog box:
 the left part of the dialog box contains the selection tree (see the drawing below) from
which the user, by means of the mouse, selects one of the project preference options
 to the right of the selection tree there is the part of the dialog box which contains
appropriate parameters for the option selected by the user from the selection tree; the
dialog box is updated after selecting the option by the user.
The right part of the dialog box includes standard buttons (OK, Cancel, Help) as well as the
following buttons:
Default - if this button is pressed, values of the project preference parameters are saved as
default values
Save - if this button is pressed, the current project preference parameters are saved under the
name provided in the General dialog box
Delete - if this button is pressed, a set of project preferences saved under the name currently
presented in the General dialog box, is deleted.
2.1.2. General
Once the General option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Project
preferences dialog box, the options shown in the figure below are provided in the right part of
the dialog box.

The following parameters may be determined in this dialog box:

 the Tolerances field enables defining the following quantities:
Parts identifying during positioning - an admissible deviation in dimensions of two parts
which are to be treated as identical during positioning
Contact of welded parts - an admissible distance between edges of the parts during
detection of a contact line (used while welding the parts)
Arc display accuracy – a number of straight segments (with respect to a round angle -
360 degrees) into which a created arc is dividied
 Automatically create groups for the assemblies - if this option is turned on, then the
elements joined by means of workshop connectors (bolts or welds) are grouped
automatically while these connectors are being inserted
 Automatically update connections – if this option is turned on, then after modification of
structure geometry the existing connections are adjusted to new structure dimensions;
turning on the option is recommended for small structures (and fast computers); for a
large structure model the operation of updating the structure may be very time
consuming
 Create assemblies from loose parts - if this option is turned on, then all parts which do not
belong to any assembly will be ascribed a new position type: assembly (during automatic
generation of assemblies); if this option is turned off, then the position type of parts not
belonging to any assembly will not be changed
 Nomenclature of assemblies – enables selection of names of assemblies created
automatically in the program:
main part name – an assembly name will consist of a name of main element (e.g.
HP14x102)
family + main part name - an assembly name will consist of a family name and a main
element name (e.g. Beam_HP14x102)
text - an assembly name will consist of any text defined by the user
 Families settings - pressing this button opens the Family manager dialog box.
2.1.3. Materials
Once the Materials option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Project
the dialog box.
The following parameters may be determined in this dialog box:

 the List of materials field contains materials available in the current project; the same
material list is included on the lists accessible in the Default materials field (profiles,
plates, user parts);

Pressing the Database button opens the Material database dialog box where the list of
materials may be defined; this dialog box allows the user to add materials from the
selected database.
 in the Default materials field the selection lists of profiles, plates, user parts and bolts are
provided; they allow selection of a material, which will be adopted by default in the dialog
boxes for definition of profiles, plates, user parts or bolts.
NOTE:
A default bolt grade chosen in the above dialog box is taken into account in the AutoCAD ©
Structural Detailing macros (connections, typical structures) and while using the options in
the case of which bolts are inserted automatically; if bolts are inserted ‘manually’ by the user,
the most-recently-selected bolt grade is remembered in the dialog box.
In the lower part of the dialog box is the Finishing of surface field; it allows defining and/or
selecting types of finishing of steel element surfaces (hot-dip galvanized, electrogalvanized,
anticorrosive paint, fireproof coat). A type of surface finishing is an additional attribute of
structure objects (profiles, plates, assemblies).
The selection list contains all defined types of surface finishing (also the None type indicating
a surface without the finishing – this type cannot be removed fom the list). This part of the
dialog box includes, as well, the following two buttons:
 Add new – opens the Add new dialog box for defining a name of a new type of surface
finishing
 Remove – removes a surface finishing type chosen on the selection list.
NOTE:
A type of surface finishing is saved in the current project; it means that a list of types is saved
in a DWG file.
NOTE:
An assembly adopts a surface finishing type from the type selected for the main part of that
assembly.
2.1.4. Material database

The Material database dialog box shown in the drawing below opens after pressing the
Database button located in the Project preferences dialog box (the Materials tab).
In the above dialog box the user may add materials from databases accessible in the program
to the list of available materials. To add a material to the list of available materials, the user
should follow the steps below:
 choose a material database from the selection list provided in the top part of the dialog
box, e.g. 001 (American material database)

 select a material type in the left panel

 press the Add > button.
Pressing the Add all >> button adds all the materials included in the left panel.
Pressing the icon deletes a selected (highlighted) material from the list of available
materials.
2.1.5. Profiles
Once the Profiles option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Project
the dialog box.
In this dialog box, the Profile database field presents a list of profile folders (databases)
available in the current project. Pressing the List of profiles button opens the dialog box in
which profiles applied in a given project are displayed. The following icons are provided in the
top part of the dialog box:
– pressing this icon opens the dialog box for selection of a database to be added to the
list of available profile databases
– pressing this icon deletes a selected profile database
, – pressing these icons moves a database one position up or down on the list; the
order is significant while searching through available profile databases.
2.1.6. Styles
Once the Styles option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Project
the dialog box.

This dialog box enables definition of table styles for the table types available in the program
(Bills of materials, Profile summary, Plate summary, etc.); the selection lists include all the
styles defined in a project.
Pressing the More… button opens the Steel summary tables – style manager dialog box. In
the bottom part of the dialog box the following two buttons are provided: Dimensioning styles
and Description styles, which when pressed open the dialog boxes Dimensioning styles and
Styles of descriptions, respectively.
2.1.7. Connectors
Once the Connectors option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Project
preferences dialog box, the options shown in the figure below are displayed in the right part of
the dialog box.
The following parameters of bolts and welds may be determined in this dialog box:
 in the Default weld type field the user may determine a default weld type (workshop weld
or site weld) if weld is created automatically (e.g. connections)

 in the Default bolt type field the user may determine a default bolt type (workshop bolt or
site bolt) if bolt is created automatically (e.g. connections); it is also possible to select a
standard (database) of bolts used in the program
 in the Colors field the user may determine the color of the following types of connectors
presented in drawings: site connectors, wokshop connectors or out-of-date connectors
(these are no longer current connectors after changes have been made in a structure
model e.g. after translating a bar a site weld is no longer needed in a given place).
Moreover, for bolts it is possible to:

 select a method of assigning colors to bolts: by bolt type, by bolt grade or by bolt
diameter
 determine a rounding up length of bolts (in the program the bolt length is automatically
calculated for connections of elements; a default value of the rounding up length is 5 mm;
the user can modify the value of the rounding up length). NOTE: a value of this
parameter is saved together with the project in a DWG file.
2.1.8. Standards
Once the Standards option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Project
preferences dialog box, the options shown in the drawing below are displayed in the right part
of the dialog box.
The above dialog box enables selection of standards used in AutoCAD © Structural
Detailing: a standard of the steel structure design and a drawing standard (drawings of steel
structure elements). A selected drawing standard imposes appropriate designations, hatching
symbols, etc. valid in a country from which a given standard comes from. The following
standards are available in the current program version:
 structural standard:
- Eurocode 3
- Polish code PN-90/B-03200
- French code CM66
- Russian code SNiP II-23-81
 drawing standard (corresponding to a structural standard):
- ISO 129
- Russian code GOST 21.101-97.
2.1.9. Project Info

Once the Project Info option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Project
the dialog box.

The above dialog box contains several edit fields which allow the user to enter general
information about the project. These texts correspond to the variables used in cells of tables
included in drawings as well as in printout headers. The following variables are applied in the
edit fields provided in the dialog box above:
Office - VAR_OFFICE
Investor - VAR_INVESTOR
Project name - VAR_PROJ_NAME
Project No. - VAR_PROJ_NUM
Address - VAR_ADDRESS
Designed - VAR_DESIGNER
Verified - VAR_VERIF
Revision - VAR_REV
Date - VAR_DATE.
Apart from that, the variables below are accessible:
Scale - VAR_SCALE
Page No. - VAR_PAGENO.
2.2. Preferences
2.2.1. Preferences
The option allows the user to adopt basic parameters used in AutoCAD © Structural
Detailing. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Preferences option
 the toolbar by pressing the icon.
Two main parts may be distinguished on the Steel tab in the Options dialog box of the
AutoCAD © program:
which the user, by means of the mouse, selects one of the program preference options

appropriate parameters for the option selected by the user from the selection tree; the
dialog box is updated after selecting the option by the user.
2.2.2. General settings

Once the General settings option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the
Structural Detailing tab (the Options dialog box of the AutoCAD © program), the working
language can be set in the right part of the dialog box shown below.
In AutoCAD © Structural Detailing there are the following countries available for which the
working language may be selected:
Great Britain Poland
USA France
Italy Spain
Russia Romania
Lithuania Latvia.
2.2.3. Display settings

Once the Display settings option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Steel
tab (the Options dialog box of the AutoCAD © program), the options shown in the figure
below are provided in the right part of the dialog box.

In this dialog box the user may switch on /off display of the following elements in the graphical
editor:
 workframes
 matching and connection marks
 bolts
 welds.
Below is the Redraw acceleration option; if this option is switched on, then while presenting a
view of a whole structure on the screen, a part of structure elements will not be shown (e.g.
connection details, connection symbols). It results in acceleration of model display on the
screen. It is recommended to activate this option in the case of large structures.
In the middle part of the dialog box the user may determine values of distances between
clipping planes and UCS.
In the lower part of the dialog box is the field for selecting a color of machinings made in
elements of a structure model.
2.2.4. Profiles
Once the Profiles option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Steel tab (the
Options dialog box of the AutoCAD © program), the options shown in the figure below are
provided in the right part of the dialog box.
In this dialog box the user may determine detailed display parameters for bar profiles:
 the Profile display dialog box allows selection of the following options:
axis only - if this option is selected, then a profile (bar) will be displayed as a line
connecting the beginning point and end point of the profile
without roundings - if this option is selected, then a simplified view of a profile (without
roundings) will be displayed
detailed - if this option is selected, then a profile (bar) will be presented with all the details
 Local coordinate system - if this option is selected, then the local coordinate system will be
presented for all the profiles defined in the project
 Bounding boxes - if this option is selected, then bounding boxes will be presented for all
the profiles defined in the project
 Centerline - if this option is selected, then the bar axis will be presented for all the profiles
defined in the project (regardless of that which option has been chosen in the Profile
display field)
 Insertion line - if this option is selected, then the line of profile insertion will be presented
for all the profiles defined in the project; this option may be applied to present profile
offsets.

2.2.5. Plates
Once the Plates option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Steel tab (the
Options dialog box of the AutoCAD © program), the options shown in the figure below are
provided in the right part of the dialog box.
In this dialog box the user may determine detailed display parameters for the defined plates:
 Local coordinate system - if this option is selected, then the local coordinate system will be
presented for all the plates defined in the project
 Bounding boxes - if this option is selected, then plate bounding boxes will be presented for
all the plates defined in the project
 Middle surface - if this option is selected, then the middle surface will be presented for all
the plates defined in the project
 Insertion plane - if this option is selected, then the insertion plane will be presented for all
the plates defined in the project; this option may be applied in offset presentation.
2.2.6. Workframes
Once the Workframes option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Steel tab
(the Options dialog box of the AutoCAD © program), the options shown in the figure below
are provided in the right part of the dialog box.
In this dialog box the user may determine detailed display parameters for the defined
workframes:
 the Line type list contains all the line types available in the project of the AutoCAD©
program; from this list the user may select a line type applied to lines of the workframes
presented in a structure model
 the Labels field allows selection of the following options:
Show labels - the option allows switching on/off the description of workframe lines
Frame shape - the option allows selecting the shape of descriptions of workframe lines;
there are three possibilities available: round, rectangular or without frame

Text style - it contains all the text styles available in the project of the AutoCAD©
program; from this list the user may select a text style applied to descriptions of lines
belonging to the workframes presented in a structure model
 Show workframe only in UCS plane - if this option is switched on, then only these
workframe lines which are positioned in the active local coordinate system are presented
in the model.
2.2.7. Connections
Once the Connections option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Steel tab
(the Options dialog box of the AutoCAD © program), the options shown in the figure below
are provided in the right part of the dialog box.
In this dialog box the user may determine detailed display parameters for labels of defined
connections (spheres), assemblies and groups:
 the Connections field enables selection of the following options:
Size - the edit field in which the user may specify the size of a connection symbol; a size
value may be defined as follows:
Relative to the screen - if this option is selected, then the size is expressed as percents
In absolute drawing units - if this option is selected, then the size is expressed in units
used in the AutoCAD © program
 the Assemblies field enables selection of the following options:
Color - a list for selecting a color of the assembly symbol
Size - an edit field for defining a size of the assembly symbol; a size value may be
specified in the following ways:
Relative to the screen - if this option is selected, then the size is given in percent
In absolute drawing units - if this option is selected, then the size is given in units used in
AutoCAD ©.
 the Groups field enables selection of the following options:
Color - a list for selecting a color of the group symbol
Size - an edit field for defining a size of the group symbol; a size value may be specified
in the following ways:
AutoCAD ©.
 the Schemes field enables selection of the following options:
Color - a list for selecting a color of the scheme symbol

Size - an edit field for defining a size of the scheme symbol; a size value may be
specified in the following ways:
AutoCAD ©.
2.2.8. Bolts and welds

Once the Bolts and welds option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Steel
tab (the Options dialog box of the AutoCAD © program), the options shown in the figure
below are provided in the right part of the dialog box.
In this dialog box the user may determine detailed display parameters for the defined bolts and
welds:
 the Bolt display field allows selection of the following options:
Simplified - if this option is switched on, then bolts will be presented as a line fragment
(segment)
Exact - if this option is switched on, then bolts will be presented with all shape details
 the Weld display field allows selection of the following options:
Simplified - line - if this option is turned on, then welds will be presented as a line
fragment (segment)
Full body - if this option is turned on, then welds will be presented with shape details
displayed.
 in the Mark field the following options can be chosen:
Show marks - the option is used to switch on/off display of a weld mark on the screen; a
mark shape also determines a weld type (see the drawing below which presents marks
of several weld types)
An extension line on which a weld mark is positioned is always perpendicular to the weld
Size - an edit field for defining a size of a weld mark; a size value may be specified in the
following ways:
AutoCAD ©.
Indicating a weld mark results in selecting a weld in a drawing.

3. OBJECT INSPECTOR
3.1. Description of Object Inspector
Inspector is a tool that allows managing elements (objects) included in a project created in
AutoCAD © Structural Detailing. By standard, the Inspector dialog box is presented in left
part of the program window, next to the field of graphical model definition.
The most important tasks carried out by Inspector include:
 presenting the project contents in the appropriate order (sequence)
 selecting elements that should be subjected to action of a selected command
 presenting and modifying project element properties (these may be single elements or
whole objects)
 activating some of the commands applied to a particular selection (it depends on the
inspector mode)
 defining, verifying and modifying groups
 verifying and modifying positions
 filtering model elements (objects)
 creating and managing drawing documentation of a project.
3.2. Object Inspector

The Object inspector dialog box is located to the left of the area of graphical model definition.
Width of the dialog box may be freely adjusted so that as much space as possible is left for the
area of graphical model definition.
The Object Inspector dialog box shown in the drawing below, can be divided into three parts:
 options that enable filtering model elements
 six tabs containing lists (set) of project elements depending on the stage of the design
process (modeling / positions / printouts)
 table presenting properties of selected objects.

Options contained in the top part of the dialog box allow limiting the number of elements
presented on the tabs describing model elements by means of filters. Filters also enable the
user to decrease the number of model elements shown in the graphical editor viewer.
The selection list located in the top part of the dialog box contains the list of filters defined by
the user in the current project. A filter may be defined in the Filter definition dialog box that can
be opened once the button is pressed.
The list always contains three default filters (they cannot be deleted):
 all objects - cancels any filter and displays all objects defined in the current project on the
list
 current selection - an element list is limited to the elements that are currently selected in
a model presented in the field of graphical model definition
 hide current selection – hides elements currently selected in a model presented in the
field of graphical model definition (obviously, if there are no objects selected, then none
of them can be hidden); the way this filter works is similar to that of the Current selection
filter, however, the result the Hide current selection filter causes is an inversion of the
result the Current selection filter brings.
Filtering is carried out after pressing the Apply button. All objects defined once filtering has
been performed, will be displayed on the list (even if they do not satisfy a filtering condition) till
the next filtering operation is made.
Once the Filter definition dialog box is closed, the list of filters defined is available in the
Object Inspector dialog box.
If the Use filtering on screen option is switched on, the model graphical editor will present only
these elements that are shown on the list in the Inspector dialog box.
The middle part of the dialog box includes the following tabs:
 Model
 Parts edition
 Positions
 Printouts
 Templates
 Structural Detailing Center.
This part of the dialog box allows presenting on the successive tabs, the current list of objects
defined in the project in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Steel. Each of the tabs is intended
for presenting elements on different stages of a design process, therefore, each of them
comprises different types of objects organized in a slightly different manner.
The bottom part of the dialog box contains the table with properties of elements selected on
the list. The table operates in the identical manner as all the properties’ dialog boxes in the
AutoCAD © program. Table characteristics include as follows:
 if one of the elements is selected, then the table presents all properties of a selected
element
 if several objects of the same type are selected, then the table presents all the fields with
properties relevant to the selected element type, however, only the values that are
common for all the elements are presented; the remaining fields are empty (yet they may
be changed)
 if several objects of different types are selected, the table presents only the fields with
properties that are common for all object types.
The first table column shows a name of a property (information), while the second one
displays its current value. A table cell that can be changed may act like an option (edit field,
selection list, button, etc.).
The table with object properties has been designed in such a manner so that it could present
these object properties that are important from the engineering viewpoint. It usually shows
only basic information (properties). Not all the pieces of information displayed in the table can
be changed.

3.3. Model
This tab of the Object Inspector dialog box manages elements of a project model.
The following model objects defined in a structure may be presented on this tab:
 Profiles
 Plates
 Subparts
 User parts
 Connections
 Groups
 Workframes.
The enumerated object types may be presented on a list or may be excluded from
presentation of objects; the following icons located in the top part of the dialog box serve this
purpose:
- Profiles
- Plates
- Subparts (plates)
- Subparts (profiles)
- User parts
- Connections
- Groups
- Workframes.
NOTE:
The listed types of objects are filtered while being presented/hidden; the currently selected
filter is applied then.
Elements found on the list may be selected by indicating with the mouse cursor (the user may
select any number of elements). When selected on the list, an element becomes
simultaneously highlighted in the graphical editor (the selection operation is interactive, in
other words, all the elements chosen in the Inspector dialog box are highlighted in the graphic
editor and vice versa: if an element is selected in the graphic editor, then the selection is also
presented in the Inspector dialog box).

An object list may be sorted; this can be done by applying one of the following two methods:
 by double-pressing the table column header (the list will be sorted then in ascending or
descending order)
 by pressing the right mouse button and selecting an appropriate option in the context
menu.
NOTE:
Sorting is always carried out separately for each element type.
The context menu appearing once the right mouse button is pressed while the cursor is
located on the Model tab, includes several options that allow performing operations on
selected objects:
 Select all - choosing this command results in selecting all elements presented on the list
 Deselect all - selecting this command cancels selection of all elements on the list
 Remove - selecting this command results in removing selected elements from a project
 Zoom selection - selecting this command zooms a structure view in such a way so that the
currently-selected elements are zoomed in
 Modify properties - selecting this command results in opening the properties dialog box
(the dialog box contents depend on a selected object type); this command is available only
when selected elements are of the same type
 Group - selecting this command results in creating a group that consists of selected
elements; this command is available when several elements are selected
 Add to group - selecting this command enables adding a selected element to an existing
group
 Remove from group - selecting this command enables removing an indicated element
from a selected group
 Change main part of group - selecting this command enables changing the main part
(main element) in a group; it is necessary to indicate an element that should be the main
part of the group
 Ungroup - selecting this command results in splitting the group into single elements
(objects); this command is available only when a group (or several groups) has been
selected on the list
 Assign position - selecting this command allows assigning a position to selected elements;
when this command is activated, the Manual Positioning dialog box opens
 Remove position - selecting this command results in removing positions from selected
elements
 Auto positioning - selecting this command enables assigning positions to selected
elements; after activating this command, the Automatic positioning dialog box opens on
the screen.
3.4. Parts edition

This table presents edit operations performed on an element (e.g. cuttings, drills) as well as
the contents of assemblies and groups. An element (or several elements) currently selected is
presented in the form of a tree.

The list of filter selection and the button allowing filter definition are inaccessible on this tab.
The Current selection filter is adopted by default.
Once the Apply button is pressed, selected objects are shown on the list. If a group is
selected, then the group structure is presented on the screen. If a single element is selected,
then edit operations carried out on this element are presented.
The manner of presentation can be changed by applying the following context menu options:
Show hierarchy of: Groups or Connections.
The following object types can be presented in the tree:
 Groups
 Connections
 Profiles
 Plates
 Subparts
 Drills
 Connectors (bolts, welds)
 Cuttings (fits)
 Notches.
The enumerated object types may be presented on a list or excluded from the presented
objects; the following icons located in the top part of the dialog box serve this purpose:
- drills
- cuttings (fits)
- bent profiles
, - connectors (welds, bolts).
All the listed icons are switched on by default.
Elements found on the list may be selected by indicating with the mouse cursor (the user may
select any number of elements). When selected on the list, an element becomes
simultaneously highlighted in the graphical editor (the selection operation is interactive, in
other words, all the elements chosen in the Inspector dialog box are highlighted in the graphic
editor and vice versa: if an element is selected in the graphic editor, then the selection is also
presented in the Inspector dialog box).
The hierarchy applied to present individual elements is illustrated in the figure below. There is
a separate hierarchy for each connection.

The context menu appearing once the right mouse button is pressed while the cursor is
located on the Parts Edition tab, includes several options that allow performing operations on
selected objects:
 Remove - selecting this command results in removing selected elements from a project
 Zoom selection - selecting this command zooms a structure view in such a way so that
the currently-selected elements are zoomed in
 Modify properties - selecting this command results in opening the properties dialog box
(the dialog box contents depend on a selected object type); this command is available
only when one element is selected on the list
 Assign position - selecting this command allows assigning positions to selected elements;
activating this command opens the Manual Positioning dialog box
 Remove position - selecting this command results in removing positions from selected
elements.
3.5. Positions
This tab presents a list of defined positions; the list is sorted by prefixes and numbers.
The position types shown below may be presented on the list or may be excluded from
presentation; the following icons, located in the upper part of the dialog box, are used for this
purpose:
- Profiles
- Plates
- Assemblies
- Groups
– User parts
- Schemes.
Below are three selection options (Parts, Families, Groups) that make it possible to activate a
mode of presentation (sorting) of positions.
The Parts option selected
In this mode elements are shown in one level, grouped by position types in the order as
follows (the first order criterion for individual parts is a prefix, the next one is a number):
1. Profiles in the alphabetical order of position designations
2. Plates in the alphabetical order of position designations

3. Assemblies in the alphabetical order of position designations

4. Groups in the alphabetical order of position designations
5. User parts in the alphabetical order of position designations
6. Schemes in the alphabetical order
The Families option selected

In this mode elements are presented in the form of a tree with the following levels:
1. Position type; the order of the items: assemblies, profiles, plates, user parts
2. Family (in the alphabetical order)
3. Within a family positions are presented in the alphabetical order of designations
The Groups option selected

This mode offers multi-level presentation of elements; it is reflected in this mode which parts
are assigned to which assemblies and groups. Positions are presented in the form of a tree
with the following levels:
1. Position types; the order of the items: groups, assemblies, profiles, plates, user parts,
schemes
For the types Groups and Assemblies successive sub-levels are created:
for groups: elements included in a given group
for assemblies: single parts included in a given assembly.
This tab presents a list of all user-defined positions; the structure of positions and documents
is shown in a form of a tree (see the drawing below).
The icon of a document included on the list may be presented as follows:

 in yellow - it means that this document is active on the edition layout
 as a red slash - it means that the element of a structure model for which the
document has been prepared, has changed
 in gray - it means that the document has been exported to a separate dwg file.
If the icon of a view provided on the list is shown in bold line, it means that it is an active view.
The context menu, that appears after pressing the right mouse button at the moment when the
cursor is located on the Positions tab, contains several options which allow performing
operations on selected positions:
 Delete - selecting this command results in removing selected positions from a project
 Select positions - choosing this command enables selecting all positions
 Attach document - choosing this command enables selection of a printout template; the
template is saved on the Templates tab
 Update documents - selecting this command allows update of documents available for a
position
 Delete documents - selecting this command enables deleting documents available for a
position
 Automatic drawings - selecting this command enables automatic generation of drawings
for a selected position; after running this command, the Automatic drawing generation
dialog box opens on the screen.

3.6. Printouts
This tab enables management of printouts in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing; it presents the
list of all printouts defined in the AutoCAD © Structural Detailing project.
Printouts are presented together with a set of views. The printout list contains all the printouts,
even those which do not include any views. The structure of user-defined printouts and views
is shown in a form of a tree. Due to logical reasons, views are placed in a printout, however,
for the user’s convenience, the tree also includes an intermediate level, so that it is obvious to
which document given views belong. If the printout layout is active, then the icon of a printout
corresponding to the active printout layout is presented in red color.
Printouts provided on the list may be selected by indicating them with the mouse cursor (take
note that only elements of one printout may be selected at a time - it is impossible to select
elements of two different printouts). Selection of the printout in the dialog box is synchronized
with the graphic editor - an appropriate drawing is displayed on the screen.
The top part of the dialog box contains two icons that enable presentation of the existing
positions in the tree in the following modes:
- model mode
- drawing mode.
cursor is located on the Printouts tab, contains several options which allow performing
operations on selected printouts:
 Delete - selecting this command results in removing selected printouts from a project
 Change name - choosing this command enables changing the name of a highlighted
printout (the name is entered to the command line)
 Add printout - selecting this command adds an empty printout to the project (the name is
entered to the command line)
 Activate - selecting this command activates a selected printout
 Unload printout – after selecting this command, a selected printout is no longer active
 Save printout - selecting this command saves a selected printout in a *.DWG format file
 Update - selecting this command updates a selected printout after making modifications in
positions
 Update all printouts - selecting this command updates all printouts after making
modifications in positions.
3.7. Templates
This tab enables management of printout templates in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing; it
presents the list of all printout templates defined in the AutoCAD © Structural Detailing
project; the template structure is presented in a form of a tree. The icon of an active template
(in the template layout) is presented in yellow.
cursor is located on the Templates tab, contains several options which allow performing
operations on selected templates:
 Delete - selecting this command results in removing selected templates from a project
 Change name - choosing this command enables changing the name of a highlighted
template (the name is entered to the command line)
 Activate - choosing this command causes a highlighted template to become active
 Add view - selecting this command adds a view to an existing template
 Change style - choosing this command enables changing a style in a selected template
 Add document template - selecting this command adds the template to a selected view.

3.8. Structural Detailing Center

This tab enables copying settings (styles) between user’s projects.
After pressing the File button and selecting a file with an earlier-saved project, the Inspector
dialog box shows all the styles defined in the selected project, which may be used in the
current project.
After highlighting a selected style, pressing the right mouse button and choosing the Copy
command, the selected style is available in the current project.
3.9. Add template

The dialog box is used to define a printout template for drawings of positions defined in the
program. The option is available from:
 Steel / Drawing template designer - the text menu
 the icon - the toolbar
 the Object inspector dialog box after pressing the right mouse button and selecting the
Add document template option on the Templates tab.
The dialog box presented below appears on screen.

The dialog box above allows defining a template for created drawings. In the steel part the
user should select one of the allowable document types concerned with the position type:
assembly, disposition scheme, group, single part, single plate or single profile.
After providing the name of a template and pressing the OK button, the template is added to
the list of available templates located on the Templates tab.
In the bottom part of the dialog box the following two tabs are included: Description (this tab
presents description of a selected position type) and Dimension style. The latter tab shows
available dimension styles for a selected position type.
3.10.Add view
Once the template name and type are determined, the user may define views included in a
given template. The Add viewport dialog box is available after pressing the right mouse
button and choosing the Add view option on the Templates tab in the Object inspector dialog
box.

The following parameters may be determined in the above dialog box:

 name of a created view (in the top part of the dialog box a name of the currently-applied
template is specified)
 the user may select view (projection) of a structure element
 the user may specify the scale for a selected view.
After pressing the OK button, within the template layout the placement of a view in a template
(not yet in a final drawing) should be indicated.
The steps described above should be repeated in case of successive views placed in a
template.
3.11.Select template
Once a position is defined, the user may select a drawing template for it. The Select template
dialog box is available after pressing the right mouse button and choosing the Attach
document option on the Positions tab in the Object inspector dialog box.

In the above dialog box, from the list of available (defined) templates the user should choose a
template to be applied for generating a drawing. Once the OK button is pressed, the template
is assigned to a selected position.
After selecting the Add to current Printout option (context menu on the Positions tab), a
created document will be placed in a final drawing (on the Layout tab).
3.12.Templates/views - steps to be followed while

creating a printout
In order to make a final drawing in the program, the user should follow the steps listed below
(in the case of steel structure elements):
1. define a template:
 specify the name and select the type of structure element (single part…) - the Add
template dialog box
 determine views (projections) that are to be included in a template
2. define positions for structure elements - the Positioning (manual or automatic) dialog
box
3. assign template to a selected position - the Select template dialog box
4. place documents in a final drawing (printout).

3.13.Definition of filters
Filters may be defined in the Filter definition dialog box presented in the drawing below; the
dialog box is opened after pressing the icon placed in the Object inspector dialog box.
Filter definition may be based on types of model elements and their properties. A filter defined
is identified by means of a name presented on the filter selection list located in the Object
Inspector dialog box.
The Filter definition dialog box allows defining a new filter or modifying a filter that already
exists (except for the two default filters). User-defined filters may be deleted from the list after
pressing the Delete button.
The top part of the dialog box contains the list of all the filters defined by the user in a project.
A selected (highlighted) filter is an active filter (i.e. a filter selected when the dialog box was
being opened).
The bottom part of the dialog box includes the field which presents a defined expression
determining the filter selected. The steps taken while defining and modifying a filter are similar;
therefore, below a description of a new filter definition is presented.
To start definition of a new filter, the user should press the New button provided in the top part
of the dialog box. Then the New filter name dialog box is displayed in the screen; the user
should enter a name of a filter being defined into the edit field located in this dialog box. If the
Inherit definition option is on, then a new filter will inherit a definition from the recently-selected
filter (which means that the expression of the recently-selected filter will be entered on the list
located in the bottom part of the Filter definition dialog box); if the Inherit definition option is
off, then a new filter will be created without any definition of expression (the list located in the
bottom part of the Filter definition dialog box will be empty). After closing the New filter

name dialog box, a filter defined is presented on the list contained in the Filter definition
dialog box.
After providing a filter name, the user may determine the expression defining a filter.
From the Type drop-down list the user may select a type of element that is to be included in
the filter defined. The contents of the Properties list (see also List of available elements,
properties and values) changes depending on the element type selected.
The user may select a filtering criterion from the Properties list; the criteria available depend
on the selected element type.
Depending on the selected type of property, the user may determine the list of selected
property values in the Value edit field. This field allows entering values that appear in the
expression defining a filter.
If the Properties and Value field are not filled in (they are empty), it means that all the
elements of the selected type (all values) will be included in the filter defined.
For some of the properties (e.g. length), the user may define a range of values in the Value
field; the following syntax can be applied then:
 single values separated with a semicolon e.g. 1;2;3;10; - only the elements listed will be
included in a filter
 range of values defined as follows: 1-100;
 values greater than and less than: -100; 10-; (respectively).
Apart from definition of values, it is also possible to define graphically the elements that are to
be included in a filter. It can be done once the Selection option is chosen. Then the Select
objects button becomes accessible; pressing this button results in closing the dialog box,
whereas the cursor is in the selection mode. Once structure elements are selected and the
right mouse button (or the ENTER key) is pressed, the dialog box appears again with the
elements selected entered into the field for defining an expression that determines a filter.
For an expression or selection to be included in a filter, it is necessary to use one of the
buttons presented below:
 - pressing this button results in replacing all the expressions defined hitherto by the
expression currently determined
 - pressing this button results in adding the currently-determined expression to

expressions defined in a filter earlier (the AND operator is added in front of the currently-
determined expression)

expressions defined in a filter earlier (the OR operator is added in front of the currently-
determined expression)

expressions defined in a filter earlier (the AND NOT operator is added in front of the
currently-determined expression).
All expressions added to a defined/modified filter are presented in the bottom part of the dialog
box with appropriate operators. Each expression is entered into a separate line; lines are
separated with logical operators which refer to expressions below.
The user cannot modify the contents of a single expression in a filter; however, it is possible to
delete lines from definitions of expressions in a filter. That can be carried out by means of two
options located in the context menu that is activated after pressing the right mouse button
while the mouse cursor is placed within the bottom part of the Filter definition dialog box.
 Delete line - once this command is selected, the program deletes a highlighted line
together with the operator located before the line being deleted
 Delete all - once this command is selected, the program deletes a whole filter definition.
Each of the filters defined can be modified at any moment while working in a project. The list
of filters defined can be seen in the top part of the Filter definition dialog box. A filter defined
in the project can be deleted from the list of available filters by highlighting a line with a filter
name and pressing the Delete button. The order of filters defined in a project can be changed

on the filter list by applying the buttons: Move up or Move down. If they are pressed, a
highlighted filter is moved one position up or down on the list of defined filters.
3.14.How to define a filter

What should be done to define a filter that allows selection of all columns made of RSJ 102 x
102 x 23.07 and RSJ 76 x 76 x 12.65 sections?
 press the New button; once the New filter name dialog box appears, enter the name of
a defined filter
 close the New filter name dialog box (the Inherit definition option is switched off); a new
filter is displayed in the Filter definition dialog box
 select Section as Type, Section type as Properties; on the Values list select lines with
sections RSJ 76 x 76 x 12.65 and RSJ 102 x 102 x 23.07 (the lines are highlighted)
 add an expression by pressing the  button; there appears the following expression:
Sections (type) = RSJ 76 x 76 x 12.65; RSJ 102 x 102 x 23.07
 select Section as Type; Family as Properties; on the Values list select the Column family
 add an expression by pressing the AND button; there appears the following
expression: Sections (type) = RSJ 76 x 76 x 12.65; RSJ 102 x 102 x 23.07 and Sections
(family) = Column.
The operation above completes the filter definition.
3.15.Objects and their properties

The Object Inspector may include:
Model elements (physical elements)
 Profiles
 Plates (single plates)
 User parts
 Subparts (plates, profiles, ribs, shear plates, etc.)
 Welds
 Bolts
 Connections
 Groups
 Assemblies – a set of parts (profiles or plates) grouped automatically in the program
based on the connectors with the ‘workshop’ attribute existing between them; in practice,
these are elements sent as a whole from a workshop to a construction site
 Workframes.
Model elements (nonphysical elements)

 Drills
 Openings
 Cuttings/fits
 Notches.
Drawing elements
 Positions
 Documents (sets of views)
 Views
 Printouts.
Below, the table of available elements, properties and values is presented.
Objects Properties Values

All properties for All the values appropriate for object properties
objects

Profiles
Profile type All the profiles available in the current project
Family All the families intended for the "profiles" type
available in the current project
Material All the materials set in preferences
Length Any real positive value
Position prefix All the position prefixes used in the current project
Position number Any integral positive number
Subpart Yes / No depending on that whether a selected
profile is a subpart
Plates
Plate thickness All the thicknesses used hitherto in a project or any
real positive value
Family All the families available in the current project
intended for the "plate" type
Material All the materials set in preferences
Type Rectangular, circular, user-defined
plate is a subpart
Subparts
Properties as for a profile or plate depending on the
subpart type
Connections
Connection type All the available connection types: (e.g. endplate)
Groups Name Any text

profile is a subpart
Workframes Workframe name All the workframe names available in the current
project
Workframe type box, wedge, prism
Positions Prefix All the position prefixes used in a project

Number Position numbers defined in the edit field
Level of Single part, assembly, group
positioning
Printouts Number Numbers defined in the edit field

Name All the drawing names available in the current
project
Format All the formats used in the current project
Positions All the positions defined in the current project

4. TYPICAL STRUCTURES
4.1. Typical structures
The option allows definition of typical (parametric) structures. The option is available from:
 menu by selecting one of the options in the submenu Steel / Parametric structures
 pressing one of the icons in the Parametric structures toolbar.
The following typical structures are available in the current version of AutoCAD © Structural
Detailing:
 Multi-bay frame
 Roof truss
 Stairs
 Stairs spiral
 Staircase
 Bracing
 Ladder
 Railing
 Cage
 Brace
 Grate spreading
 Purlin spreading
 Compound profile
 Castellated beam
 Column (plate girder)
 Beam (plate girder)
 Multisegment beam (plate girder).
Parametric structures are available from the menu (Steel / Parametric structures) and the
Parametric structures toolbar.
 Multi-bay frame -
 Roof truss -
 Stairs -
 Stairs spiral -
 Staircase -
 Bracing -
 Ladder -
 Railing -
 Cage -
 Brace -
 Compound profile -
 Grate spreading -
 Purlin spreading - .
Plate girders are avialble from the menu (Steel / Plate girders) and from the Plate girder
toolbar.
 Column (plate girder)
 Beam (plate girder)
 Multisegment beam (plate girder)
 Castellated beam .
After selecting a structure an additional dialog box is displayed on the screen in which a user
may determine parameters of a selected steel structure. The shape of this dialog box depends
on a selected structure type or structure element.

5. WORKFRAME
5.1. Workframe
The option allows determining a workframe that facilitates definition of a structure model in 3D
space. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Workframes / Create workframe option
 from the toolbar by pressing the icon
 the command line: RBCS_WF.
Once the Workframes option is selected, the dialog box shown in the drawing below, is
displayed on the screen.
The Workframe dialog box can be divided into three parts:

 in the left part of the dialog box the user may define basic information concerning a
workframe:
workframe name
workframe type:
box
wedge
prism
 the bottom part of the dialog box contains the following options:
Surface only - if this option is switched on, only external lines of a workframe are created;
if this option is switched off, then all workframe lines are created
Left diagonal - if this option is switched on, additional lines are also created, these are the
diagonals of a quadrangle area inclined to the left
Right diagonal - if this option is switched on, additional lines are also created, these are
the diagonals of a quadrangle area inclined to the right
Without description - if this option is switched on, descriptions of axes are not provided; if
this option is switched off, then workframe axes will be described
Show axes in drawings - if this option is switched on, then axes of a defined workframe
are presented in drawings; if this option is switched off, then workframe axes play only
auxiliary role in modeling and are not shown in any drawing
 the middle part of the dialog box includes two tabs: Size/Division and Axis descriptions;
their contents depend on a selected type of a workframe
 the right part of the dialog box contains two icons:
- creates a workframe based on parameters determined in the dialog box
- is used to adopt (inherit) parameters from a workframe that is already defined.
The dialog box opens showing the workframe type defined recently and parameters assumed
for it.

5.2. Box
Once box is selected as a workframe type, the Workframe dialog box contains two tabs:
Size/Division and Axis descriptions.
The Size/Division tab is shown in the figure below.
The following options are provided in this dialog box:

 Length (Y) - fields where length of a workframe and number of divisions along the
workframe length are determined
 Width (X) - fields where width of a workframe and number of divisions along the
workframe width are determined
 Height (Z) - fields where height of a workframe and number of divisions along the
workframe height are determined.
If the Non-uniform option next to the options listed, is switched off, then a workframe will be
generated automatically based on the parameter values defined in the edit fields discussed. If
the Non-uniform option is switched on, then the edit fields become inaccessible; instead, the
(…) button becomes available which - when pressed, opens the Lines distribution dialog box
where position of successive workframe axes may be determined.
The Axis descriptions tab is shown in the figure below.

 Length (Y) - fields where an axis description along the workframe length is determined; if
the option is switched on (the  symbol appears), the description will be generated, and if
the option is switched off, the axis description will not be generated
 Width (X) - fields where an axis description along the workframe width is determined; if
 Height (Z) - fields where an axis description along the workframe height is determined; if
the option is switched off, the axis description will not be generated.
For each of the options listed three fields are accessible:
 Prefix - field where a prefix of workframe axes can be determined for the automatic
description of workframe axes

 Start value - field where a start value for workframe axes can be determined for the
automatic description of workframe axes
 Step - field where a value of increment for successive workframe axes can be
determined for the automatic description of workframe axes.
For the width (X) and the length (Y) it is possible to choose the location of a description: on the
right or on the left side of a workframe line.
If the User-defined option next to the options listed, is switched off, then a workframe
description will be generated automatically based on the parameter values defined in the edit
fields discussed. If the User-defined option is switched on for any of the options, then the edit
fields for that option become inaccessible; instead, the (…) button becomes available which -
when pressed, opens the Lines description dialog box where the description of successive
workframe axes may be determined.
5.3. Wedge
Once wedge is selected as a workframe type, the Workframe dialog box contains two tabs:

 Length (Y) - fields where length of a workframe and number of divisions along the
workframe length are determined
 Width (X) - fields where width of a workframe and number of divisions along the
workframe width are determined
 Height (Z) - fields where height of a workframe and number of divisions along the
workframe height are determined.
 Vertex – a field which determines a coordinate of the vertex position for a wedge-shaped
workframe.
If the Non-uniform option next to the options listed, is switched off, then a workframe will be
(…) button becomes available which - when pressed, opens the Lines distribution dialog box
where position of successive workframe axes may be determined.


 Length (Y) - fields where an axis description along the workframe length is determined; if
 Width (X) - fields where an axis description along the workframe width is determined; if
 Height (Z) - fields where an axis description along the workframe height is determined; if
the option is switched off, the axis description will not be generated.
 Step - field where a value of increment for successive workframe axes can be
determined for the automatic description of workframe axes.
For the width (X) and the length (Y) it is possible to choose the location of a description: on the
right or on the left side of a workframe line.
fields for that option become inaccessible; instead, the (…) button becomes available which -
workframe axes can be determined.
5.4. Prism
Once prism is selected as a workframe type, the Workframe dialog box contains two tabs:

 Base radius - fields that determine a radius of the circle circumscribed on the prism base
and a number of radial divisions
 Top radius - field that determines a radius of the circle circumscribed on the prism top
 Height - fields that determine height of a workframe and number of divisions along the
workframe height.
If the Non-uniform option next to the Height option is switched off, then a workframe will be
(…) button becomes available which when pressed, opens the Lines distribution dialog box
where position of successive workframe axes can be determined.


 Radius - fields that determine an axis description along the workframe radius; if the option
is switched on (the  symbol appears), the description will be generated, and if the option
is switched off, the axis description will not be generated
 Width - the option is not available
 Height - fields that determine an axis description along the workframe height; if the option
is switched on (the  symbol appears), the description will be generated, and if the option
is switched off, the axis description will not be generated.
 Step - field where a value of increment for successive workframe axes can be determined
for the automatic description of workframe axes.
fields for that option become inaccessible; instead, the (…) button becomes available which
workframe axes can be determined.
5.5. Lines distribution

If the Non-uniform option is switched on for any of the options on the Size/Division tab of the
Workframe dialog box, then the edit fields become inaccessible; pressing the (…) button
opens the Lines distribution dialog box which provides the table that allows the user to
determine position of the successive workframe axes.
To define the position of workframe axes, the user should:
 define spacing between successive workframe axes or define the coordinate of the
workframe axis (calculated from the workframe beginning)
 perform the above operation for the successive workframe axes
 press the OK button.

5.6. Lines description

If the User-defined option is switched on for any of the options on the Axis descriptions tab of
the Workframe dialog box, then the edit fields become inaccessible; pressing the (…) button
opens the Lines description dialog box which provides the table that allows the user to
determine descriptions of the successive workframe axes.
To define descriptions of workframe axes, the user should:
 define description of the first axis
 move to the next table line and define description of the second axis
 for some descriptions (e.g. width - X and length - Y) select location of the axis
description; on the right or on the left side of the workframe line
 perform the above operation for the workframe axes defined
 press the OK button.
5.7. Example of definition of a workframe

To start definition of a workframe, do as follows:
 select the menu option Steel / Workframes / Create workframe or press the icon
 in the Workframe dialog box determine the following parameters:
in the Name edit field enter: Workframe - 3D Workshop
select the workframe type: Box
switch off the following options: Surface only, Left diagonal, Right diagonal, Without
description
switch on the option Show axes in drawings
 on the Size / Division tab enter the following workframe dimensions with respect to the
system axes:
Width (X): 12000 / 2
Length (Y): 30000 / 6
Height (Z): switch on the Non-uniform option and press the (...) button located next to this
option; in the Line distribution (length) dialog box enter the values as follows:
in the Coordinate column: 5000, 7500, 9000; values of axis spacings will be defined
automatically; press the OK button in the Line distribution (length) dialog box
 move on to the Axis descriptions tab, switch on descriptions for all the dimensions (the 
symbols appear) and choose the following descriptions for individual workframe axes:
Width (X): Prefix: wid_, Start value: A, Step: 1, left
Length (Y): Prefix: len_, Start value: 1, Step: 1, left
Height (Z): Prefix: pos_, Start value: 0, Step: 1
 press the Create icon located in the right-hand part of the Workframe dialog box
 specify the workframe origin and determine the direction of the workframe X axis:
direction of the X axis of the global coordinate system (NOTE: the direction of the X axis
of the workframe does not need to be compatible with the X axis of the global coordinate
system).
The generated workframe is illustrated in the drawing below.


6. PROFILES
6.1. Profiles
The options allows defining a member with a selected profile. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Profiles option
 the command line: RBCS_PROFILE.
Once the Profiles option is selected, the dialog box shown in the figure below is displayed on
the screen.
The Profile dialog box may be divided into three parts:

 in the left part of the dialog box a user may define basic information concerning a profile
of a defined member:
on the Profile list a user may select a profile for a defined member (on the list the
member profile defined recently is proposed); pressing the (…) button opens the Profile
List dialog box in which profiles from the databases available in the program may be
added to the list of available profiles.
on the Material list the user may select type of a material assigned to a defined member
on the Family list the user may select a family (group) of members to which a defined
member will be assigned
in the Insertion point field a user may determine coordinates of the member shift (offset),
i.e. Dx, Dy as well as rotation of a member profile about the member longitudinal axis (a
value of rotation may be selected from the values proposed on the list or may be entered
into the Rotation field); the offset denotes shift of a profile center with respect to the
insertion line
 the middle part of the dialog box comprises the graphical field presenting a selected
profile of a defined member positioned in relation to the insertion line (under the graphical
field characteristic distances of the profile fibers from the profile axis are presented); the
graphical field enables graphical definition of offsets: it can be done by shifting a profile
with respect to the axis by means of the mouse or by indicating characteristic points of a
profile.
Options provided in the dialog box also enable definition of relative offsets (with respect
to values related to the cross section and characteristic points of a profile); location of
section characteristic points (their number depends on the section type and shape) may
be determined by specifying certain values connected directly with the cross section
(these do not have to be absolute values) – characteristic points include:
- (0;0) center of gravity of a section
- points presented in the drawing below whose coordinates are determined by the values
Vy, Vpy, Vz, Vpz, Mid (they define a relative location of a point in the cross section)

Profile characteristic points are marked in red in the dialog box (in the drawing of a
selected profile); after clicking on a characteristic point of a profile, the profile is translated
and the edit fields Dx and Dy in the Insertion point field are filled out automatically.
Under the schematic drawing of a profile is the More >> (or Less <<) button, which when
pressed opens (closes) an additional field where:
1. a surface finishing type for a profile (e.g. hot-dip galvanized, electrogalvanized,
anticorrosive paint, fireproof coat) can be chosen; a default type of surface finishing can
be selected in the Project preferences dialog box on the Materials tab; this dialog box
also allows adding a new surface finishing type or deleting a selected type from the list of
available surface finishing types
2. profile properties (area, moments of inertia, etc.) are presented – see the description of
the Profile list dialog box; after positioning the mouse cursor in this field and pressing the
right mouse button, the context menu appears on the screen – the following options are
available there:
- Select All – selects the contents of the edit field
- Copy – copies the contents of the edit field to the Clipboard
- Paste – pastes the Clipboard contents to the edit field
The following two icons are also available in this part of the dialog box:
- once it is pressed, position of axes in the graphical field is blocked and user may
shift a profile
- once it is pressed, position of a profile in the graphical field is blocked and user may
shift profile axes
 the right part of the dialog box contains the following icons that allow defining a member
by means of:
- 2 points
- line
- 1 point (a member will be defined as perpendicular to UCS)
and the icon - used to adopt (inherit) parameters from a member profile that is
already defined.

The dialog box opens showing parameters of the member profile defined recently.
6.2. Bent profiles

The option enables defining a bent bar of selected profile. The option is available from:
 menu by selecting the option Steel / Bent profiles
 command line: RBCS_BENT.
After selecting the Bent profiles option, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on
the screen.
Three parts may be distinguished in the Bent profile dialog box:

 in the left part of the dialog box basic information concerning the profile of a defined bar
may be determined:
from the Profile list the user may choose a profile of a defined bar (the last-defined bar
profile is proposed on the list); pressing the (…) button opens the Profile List dialog box,
where profiles from the databases accessible in the program may be added to the list of
available profiles
from the Material list a type of material assigned to a defined bar may be selected
from the Family list the user may select a bar family (group), to which a defined bar will
be assigned
the Insertion point field allows the user to determine coordinates of the bar offset: Dx, Dy
and rotation of the bar profile about the bar longitudinal axis (value of rotation may be
chosen from the values proposed on the list or entered in the Rotation field); the offset
denotes translation of the profile center with respect to the insertion line
 the middle part of the dialog box contains the graphical field presenting a selected profile
of a defined bar positioned in relation to the insertion line (under the graphical field
characteristic distances of the profile fibers from the profile axis are presented); the
graphical field enables graphical definition of offsets: it can be done by translating a
profile with respect to the axis by means of the mouse or by indicating characteristic
points of a profile.
Under the schematic drawing of a profile is the More >> (or Less <<) button, which
when pressed opens (closes) an additional field where:
1. a surface finishing type for a profile (e.g. hot-dip galvanized, electrogalvanized,
anticorrosive paint, fireproof coat) can be chosen; a default type of surface finishing can
be selected in the Project preferences dialog box on the Materials tab; this dialog box
also allows adding a new surface finishing type or deleting a selected type from the list
of available surface finishing types
2. profile properties (area, moments of inertia, etc.) are presented – see the description
of the Profile list dialog box; after positioning the mouse cursor in this field and pressing
the right mouse button, the context menu appears on the screen – the following options
are available there:
- Select All – selects the contents of the edit field
- Copy – copies the contents of the edit field to the Clipboard
- Paste – pastes the Clipboard contents to the edit field

There are also two icons available in this part of the dialog box:
- when pressed, position of axes in the graphical field is blocked and the user may
translate a profile
- when pressed, position of a profile in the graphical field is blocked and user may
translate profile axes
 the right part of the dialog box contains the following icons that allow definition of a bar
by:
- 3 arc points
- arc: start, end and radius of an arc
- polyline
- selection of object
and the icon - used to adopt (inherit) parameters from a bar profile defined earlier.
In the bottom part of the dialog box the Divide segments option is provided; if the option is
switched off, then a bent profile is defined as one object (despite that that it may consist of
several ‘parts’, e.g. a polyline composed of arc, segment and arc); if this option is switched on,
the a bent profile is divided into separate objects when the type of profile parts changes (a
polyline composed of arc, segment and arc is divided into three separate parts: 2 arcs and a
segment). The drawing below illustrates schematically how this option works.
The dialog box opens showing parameters of the bar profile defined recently.
6.3. Example of definition of a user-defined section

The example below presents definition of a section of a steel flat bar that may be used in
definition of a structure model. To define a user-defined section (bar section), do as follows:
 applying the AutoCAD © program options:
- draw a rectangle (the option Draw / Rectangle) with the dimensions 590x4050 (see the
drawing below)
- select a region (the option Draw / Region) and indicate the rectangle drawn
 applying AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Steel options:

- run the option Steel / User-defined sections or press the icon
- indicate the defined region (rectangle)
- select saving of the section in the current project (the Locally option in the command
line)
- specify a section name, e.g.: FLAT 590x4050 (a name may consist of 4 letters and
designations describing profile dimensions)
- define a profile shape code.

NOTE:
Section codes are adopted according to designations used in the ROBOT program; code
descriptions are provided in the ROBOT program help.
Thus-defined section of a profile will be added to the list of available profiles (e.g. in the
Profiles dialog box, a part of which is shown in the drawing below). The section will be
available only in the current project.
If the Database option is selected, then to save a profile to a database, the user should follow
the steps listed below in the Saving section to database dialog box:
 specify a name: maximally four letters (Attention: using digits is not allowed)
 define dimensions of the profile (real numbers defining information about the profile):
= if one dimension is given, specify Dimension 1
= if two dimensions are given, specify Dimension 1 and Dimension 3.
6.4. Profile list

The Profile list dialog box shown in the figure below opens after pressing the (…) button
provided in the Profile dialog box.
The above dialog box enables adding profiles from databases accessible in the program to the
list of profiles available in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Steel. To add a profile to the list
of available profiles, the user should:
 select a profile folder in the Database field, e.g. AISC (American Hot Rolled Shapes)

 select a profile type

 select a profile in the left panel
 press the Add > button.
Pressing the Add all >> button results in adding all the profiles included in the left panel.
Pressing the < Remove button deletes a selected (highlighted) profile from the list of available
profiles. Pressing the << Remove all button results in deleting all the profiles provided on the
list of available profiles (in the right panel) except for the profiles that have already been used
in the project.
The Remove option is unavailable for profiles that have already been applied in a project.
The bottom right corner of the dialog box contains the More >> (or Less <<) button; if
pressed, it opens an additional part of the dialog box with information on basic section
properties (dimensions of the cross section, area, moments of inertia, section modulus for
calculation of torsion stresses, elastic section moduli (bending), mass). This additional part of
the dialog box is closed on pressing the Less >> button.

7. PLATES
7.1. Plates
The option allows defining a plate. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Plates option
 from the toolbar by pressing the icon
 the command line: RBCS_PLATE.
Once the Plates option is selected, the dialog box shown in the drawing below, is displayed on
the screen.
The Plate dialog box may be divided into three parts:

 in the left part of the dialog box a user may define basic information concerning a defined
plate:
on the Thickness list a user may select a value of plate thickness from the values
proposed on the list or enter this value into the Thickness field
on the Material list the user may select the type of material assigned to a defined plate
on the Family list the user may select a family (group) of plates to which a defined plate
will be assigned
the following three icons are also available:
- once this icon is pressed, the defined plate will be a rectangular plate
- once this icon is pressed, the defined plate will be a circular plate
- once this icon is pressed, a plate shape will be defined by a user (it will be a closed
polyline)
the Insertion plane field enables a user to determine the plane of plate insertion as upper,
lower, middle and free; a user may also determine here a value of the offset denoting the
distance to the insertion plane related to UCS
 the middle part of the dialog box comprises a graphical field presenting a defined plate
positioned in relation to the insertion point; in the graphical field a user may define offsets
graphically: it is possible by shifting the plate with respect to the point by means of the
mouse or indicating characteristic points of the plate
the edit fields included in the middle part of the dialog box are used to determine plate
dimensions; depending on the plate type - circular, rectangular, arbitrarily shaped - the
following parameters are available:
circular plate - value of R radius and value of Dr offset that determines the distance of the
insertion point from the center of a circular plate
rectangular plate - dimensions of W and L sides and dimensions of Dx and Dy offsets
that determine distances between the insertion point and center of a rectangular plate
Under the schematic drawing of a plate there is the More >> (or Less <<) button, which
when pressed opens (closes) an additional field where a surface finishing type for a plate
(e.g. hot-dip galvanized, electrogalvanized, anticorrosive paint, fireproof coat) can be
chosen; a default type of surface finishing can be selected in the Project preferences

dialog box on the Materials tab; this dialog box also allows adding a new surface finishing
type or deleting a selected type from the list of available surface finishing types
 the right part of the dialog box contains the following icons that allow plate definition by
means of:
- point
- polyline
- contour (a contour should be indicated) – the option is available for plates defined by
the user
– internal point (an internal point of the contour should be indicated) - the option is
available for plates defined by the user
and the icon - used to adopt (inherit) parameters from a plate that is already defined.
The dialog box opens showing the plate parameters defined recently.
7.2. Plate definition

In order to define a plate, the user should first follow the steps listed below:
 select the plate shape type (rectangular, circular or user-defined)
 define plate dimensions (number of dimensions depends on a selected shape of a plate)
 define plate thickness
 determine a material that a plate will be made of
 determine a family to which a plate will belong
 if needed, select a surface finishing type for a plate (after pressing the More >> button)
 determine a plane of plate insertion and if need be, a value of the offset denoting the
distance to the insertion plane related to UCS.
Once these actions are performed, a plate should be defined by pressing one of the icons:
a plate will be defined by indicating the insertion point and direction
a plate will be defined by defining a polyline, rectangle or circle depending on the
selected type of plate
a plate will be defined by indicating an existing contour (polyline) - the option is
available for plates defined by the user
a plate will be defined by indicating an internal point of the existing contour (polyline)
- the option is available for plates defined by the user.

8. USER PARTS
8.1. User parts
The option enables definition of user parts (non-standard structure elements, e.g.
prefabricated elements, user-defined elements, etc.). User parts have properties of a standard
element, e.g. weight, position symbol, etc.; these parts are presented in documentation. The
option is accessible from:
 the menu by selecting the option Steel / User parts
 the command line: RBCS_USERPART.
After calling up the User parts option, the dialog box shown below appears on the screen.
Objects that are user parts are defined in the model layout; they are presented on printouts as
well. A form how they are presented on printouts is determined by the user through blocks
linked with user parts. Blocks may consist of any objects of the AutoCAD © program.
User parts are saved to databases which, in turn, are grouped into categories (one category
may include any number of databases). Databases are separate *.mdb format files; each
database has a description displayed in the dialog box. There is a possibility to add user’s own
categories and add databases in selected categories.
NOTE:
A database may belong only to one category.
User parts that belong to one or several databases may be linked with the same blocks. A
block must exist and be saved on the hard disk. User parts included in databases are linked
with blocks (*.dwg format files), which determine the way they are presented (symbol) in a
model and on printouts.

User parts belong to families; that where they belong determines their properties such as
color, layer, etc. User parts may be assigned positions, however, note should be taken that
while positioning the program does not check geometry of user parts. The criteria for
identification of user elements are: their name, category as well as properties saved in the
database.
A user part weight defined in the dialog box above is taken into account while calculating the
weight of a selected structure part and the center of gravity of a structure.
As mentioned above, user parts are defined in the model layout and presented in this layout in
the form of blocks linked with them. For a chosen part, the block may be scaled independently
in the directions of the local coordinate system of an object. Scale factors refer to the
directions determined by the local coordinate system of a 3D block. The same scale factors
are applied both to a three-dimensional block in the model layout and to 2D blocks presenting
user parts in drawings.
Once positioned, user parts may be drawn as single parts or be presented in drawings of
assemblies or groups. Drawings of user parts are generated automatically, considering the
location and orientation (the local coordinate system) of a part defined in the model layout. In
drawings user parts are shown as blocks linked with them.
Below is presented a drawing that illustrates which scale factors are used for views and
directions.
User parts are presented in drawings only in othogonal projections.

User parts shown in drawings of assemblies or groups may be presented (depending on the
user selection) using the line type and the line color chosen in a dimensioning style.
User parts cannot be dimensioned; descriptions for them are generated in the same way as
for single parts (with the possibility to use variables).
User parts defined in the model layout are modifiable; take note, however, that not all
parameters of user parts can be changed.
It is possible to execute the basic edit commands of the AutoCAD © program on user parts,
like copying, translation, etc.
User parts may be components of assemblies, groups or schemes.
NOTE:
There is no possibility to perform the machining operations using the AutoCAD © Structural
Detailing options on user parts.

8.2. User part database

The User parts database dialog box illustrated in the drawing below makes it possible to
perform operations in databases and categories. It also enables viewing the contents of
individual databases.
The dialog box opens on pressing the (…) button located in the User parts dialog box.
The basic operations that may be performed in the dialog box above include:
Adding a new category

It allows creating a new category.
After pressing the Add new button, information about a new category may be given: the
category name in the Category field as well as the category description and file.

8.3. Creating a new database

It allows creating a new database (file) in the default folder; the database will belong to a
category chosen from the selection list.
In the dialog box, a name and a description of the database should be specified.
8.4. Definition of a new user part

Below is presented the procedure adopted while defining a new user part.
Definition of new user part

Pressing the (…) button in the top part of the User parts dialog box adds a new user part to
the current database belonging to a selected category.
A part may be added in two ways (by choosing one of the options mentioned):
- by blocks
- by selection of parts.
Blocks
Once this option is selected, adding a new object consists in linking parts with blocks saved in
external *.dwg files.
After pressing the Define new button, define a name of a user part in the Name field. Values
in the remaining edit fields for the newly-defined user part are inherited from the previous user
part.
In the central part of the dialog box specify access paths to external *.dwg files. The insertion
point and the local coordinate system of an object are defined in DWG files.
In the lower part of the dialog box determine parameters of the user part (a weight, a scale
and dimensions for individual directions).
Selected objects
Once this option is selected, adding a new object consists in indicating on the screen objects
that will make up blocks linked to the user part.
After pressing the Define new button, the User parts dialog box closes; specify a name of the
user part in the command line. Next, the command line shows the following commands that
enable:
- selection of objects that will make up the blocks linked with the 3D projection
- selection of objects that will make up the blocks linked with the projections: XY, XZ and YZ.
For all objects it is necessary to determine the base point and a point positioned on the
positive side of the axis. Blocks for projections are saved in *.dwg files.
Once selection of objects for the mentioned projections is complete, the User parts dialog box
appears on the screen. Edit fields in the upper and central parts of the dialog box are filled out
with names given while defining the projections.

In the lower part of the dialog box determine parameters of the user part (a weight, a scale
and dimensions for individual directions); by default values of the weight and dimensions equal
zero, whereas scale factor values equal 1.0.
Insertion of a user part

Pressing the Insert button inserts the user part chosen in the dialog box into the model layout
at the point indicated by the user.
Saving of modifications
Pressing the Insert button accepts changes made in the existing databases (the button is
inactive until changes are made).

9. GRATES
9.1. Grates
The option enables definition of grates. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the option Steel / Grates
 the command line: RBCS_GRATE.
After calling up the Grates option, the dialog box as shown below, appears on the screen.
The Grates dialog box may be divided into three parts:

 the left part of the dialog box is used to determine basic information about a defined
grate:
in the Type field a name of the defined grate may be specified
the Material list allows selecting a material type assigned to the defined grate
from the Family list it is possible to choose a family (group) of grates to which the defined
grate will be ascribed (e.g. Additional Element)
moreover, values of the following parameters have to be defined:
- self-weight – based on this value the program calculates a grate weight
- thickness – a grate thickness value may be selected out of the values on the list or
typed in the Thickness field
- level offset – a value of the distance between the grate insertion point and the bottom
left corner of the grate; an offset equals zero, if the the bottom left corner of the grate
coincides with the grate insertion point
 in the central part of the dialog box is a graphic field presenting the defined grate
two types of the grate shape are available:
- rectangular grate
- grate with any shape defined by means of a polyline.
Edit fields located in the central part of the dialog box are used to determine dimensions
of the grate (it refers to a rectangle-shaped grate): side dimensions W and L
Apart from that, there is a possibility to define a load-carrying direction for the grate (an
angle in the XY plane); the direction is presented in the model layout and drawings
using the symbol ; the longer axis of the symbol is an axis parallel to the load-
carrying direction of the grate; the symbol of the load-carrying direction is presented (in
the same color and the same style as the grate edges) only in a top view and a 3D view
of the grate in the plane parallel to the grate plane; the grate with its basic elements is
illustrated below

 the right part of the dialog box holds the following icons that make possible definition of
the grate by means of:
- point (this method is not available for a shape defined by polyline)
- polyline
- contour (a contour should be indicated) – this option is accessible for grates defined
by the user (this method is not available for the rectangular shape of the grate)
- internal point (an internal point of a contour should be indicated) - this option is
accessible for grates defined by the user (this method is not available for the rectangular
shape of the grate)
and the icon – is used to adopt parameters of the earlier-defined grate.
The dialog box opens showing the most-recently defined parameters of the grate.

10. MACHINING
10.1.Fit to line
The option enables the user to perform the operation of fitting a profile to a defined line. The
option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Machining / Fit to line option
 the toolbar by pressing icon
 from the command line: RBCS_FITTOLINE.
The operation of fitting a profile may be performed either by means of a line defined using the
AutoCAD © program tools or by defining the position of two points determining a line. The user
may, as well, fit several profiles positioned on the cutting line (see the drawing below).
The Cut by line option operates in the similar manner. Moreover, the direction is indicated (a
point on one side of the cutting line); it determines the part of an object which remains after the
cutting operation is performed. The difference in the manner the options Fit to line and Cut by
line operate is presented below - the drawings show an object before performing the fitting and
cutting operations (together with a defined line) and an object generated after performing the
fitting and cutting operations.
Cut by line
Fit to line

10.2.Fit to polyline
The option enables the user to perform the operation of fitting an object to a defined broken
line (polyline). The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Machining / Fit to polyline option
 from the command line: RBCS_FITTOPOLY.
The plane of fitting (cutting off) consists of a few segments, as shown in the drawing below.
10.3.Fit to object
The option enables the user to perform the operation of fitting two structural elements to each
other. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Machining / Fit to object option
 from the command line: RBCS_FITOBJ.
Once the Fit to object option is selected, the user should indicate two structure elements that
are to be fitted to each other: object that is being adjusted and object to which the element
selected earlier should be adjusted. After selecting the objects, the dialog box shown in the
drawing below is displayed on the screen.
In the top part of the dialog box – in the Type of fitting field the user may select as follows:
mode of object fitting:
 Active - if this option is selected, then fitting of objects remembers the object to which the
selected part is being fitted; fitting of objects is updated each time after modification of
the fitted object and the object to which the object is being fitted (after modifying a
position of any of the objects, the parts will be automatically fitted applying all the

parameters defined in the dialog box); if the object to which the selected part is being
fitted, is deleted, then fitting of objects is deleted, as well
 Passive – if this option is selected, then fitting of objects is not updated each time after
modification of the fitted object and the object to which the object is being fitted.
NOTE:
Once fitting of objects is completed, the mode of object fitting (passive, active) may be
changed in the Properties dialog box.
type of object fitting:

 External - mode aimed at fitting one of the chosen objects to the external contour of
another object
 Internal - mode aimed at fitting one of the chosen objects to the internal contour of another
object.
If the internal mode is selected, there are four options available:
Free
mode applied to perform quick fitting operation; in this
case determining parameter values is not required.
If due to technological reasons more exact parameter
determination is required, then the user may apply one of
the three methods described below.
1 Type
A distance value may vary for flanges and web of the
element which undergoes fitting.
2 Type
For this type of fitting the user may switch on/off
chamfering. Note: An angle applied during the chamfering
operation performed on some of the elements always
equals 45 degrees.

3 Type
This type of fitting enables adjusting objects with
additionally-defined openings. Opening parameters
include: position of the opening center, translations of the
opening center position and radius value. It is also
possible to perform the chamfer operation on some
elements of the parts which undergo fitting.
In the bottom part of the dialog box there are the following options:
 Consider roundings - if this option is switched off, then roundings of rolled profiles will not
be considered while generating a cutting plane
 Cut protrusions to face; if the option is switched on, additional planes that form a contour
of a part (profile, plate) are accounted for in a cut shape; these planes are shown in red in
the drawings below; out of these planes the program selects this one, in the case of which
the value of the inclination angle between the plane and the object cut is the closest to 90
degrees.
The operation of the Cut protrusions to face option is illustrated in the drawings below.
The Cut protrusions to face option is The Cut protrusions to face option is
switched off switched on
Pressing the Apply button changes parameters of the selected objects. If the OK button is
pressed, it results in performing the defined operation of object fitting based on the adopted
parameters and closes the dialog box.
When pressed, the Close button causes the defined operation to be conducted without saving
the changes made recently.
Pressing the Next button starts fitting of successive objects.

10.4.Example of the fit to object operation

To start fitting to each other the two I-sections illustrated in the drawing below, do as follows:
 select the menu option Steel / Machining / Fit to object or press the icon
 indicate the profile to which the other profile should be fitted (in the drawing this is the
profile no. 1) and the profile which should be fitted to the profile no. 1 (in the drawing this is
the profile no. 2)
 in the Fit by object dialog box determine the parameters as follows:
Type of fitting: Passive, Internal
Type: 1 Type
switch off the Consider roundings option
adopt the fitting dimensions as presented in the drawing below
 press the Apply button in the Fit by object dialog box; the I-sections fitted are presented
in the following drawing.

10.5.Object snap settings

While making a drawing the user may position the cursor at snap points of objects (profiles or
plates). The options which enable placing the cursor at selected points may be activated in the
Snap Mode dialog box shown in the figure below. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Workspace / Object snap settings option
 the command line: RBCS_PSNAP.
The above dialog box enables the user to determine the following snap points at which the
cursor may be positioned:
axis - snap point:
plate - plate center
profile - three snap points on the bar
axis: beginning, middle and end
outer corners - snap points are the

corners of the outer contour
circumscribed on a cross section
inner corners - snap points are the

inner corners of a section as shown in
the drawing

outer midpoints - snap points are the

midpoints of outer contour sides of a
section.
inner midpoints - snap points are the

midpoints of section inner sides.
composite sections - the option is

intended for determining snap points of
composite sections; in this mode, snap
points are specified for each part of a
composite section.
In addition, the Auto option is available; if it is switched on, then snap points are positioned on
the axis.
10.6.Cut by bisector
The option enables the operation of fitting two profiles to each other using a bisector. The
option is accessible from:
 the menu by selecting the option Steel / Machining / Cut by bisector
 the command line: RBCS_CUTBISEC.

The cutting operation may be performed:

 as cutting with a bisector; the result of this option is a cut as shown in the drawing below.
 as cutting with alignment of profile edges (the cutting line goes between the points A and
B); the result of this option is a cut as shown in the drawing below.
For the both types of cutting it is possible to define a distance between the cut profiles.
On pressing the Apply button parameters in selected objects are modified. Pressing the OK
button performs the defined operation of cutting the profiles based on the adopted parameters
and closes the dialog box.
After pressing the Close button, the defined operation is performed without saving the
changes made recently. Cutting of successive profiles starts on pressing the Next button.

10.7.Chamfering of corners - plates

The option enables the user to perform the operation of chamfering plate corners. The option
is available from:
 the menu by selecting the option: Steel / Machining / Chamfer plate corner
 the command line: RBCS_CHAMFCORN.
After activating the option, indicating a plate and the plate corner, the dialog box shown in the
drawing below is displayed on the screen.
Once the chamfer type is chosen, chamfer dimensions should be defined (the number of
available dimensions depends on the selected chamfer type). The chamfer is an active object,
which means that it may be edited later on (change of chamfer type, modification of parameter
values); deletion of a plate chamfer is also possible.
Pressing the Apply button modifies chamfer parameters. Pressing the OK button runs the
defined chamfer operation based on the parameters adopted and closes the dialog box.
After pressing the Close button the program carries out the defined operation without saving
the changes made recently. Pressing the Next button starts chamfering of the next plate
corner.
10.8.Example of chamfering plate corners

To start chamfering corners of the plate illustrated in the drawing below, follow the steps
below:
 select the menu option Steel / Machining /Chamfer plate corner or press the icon
 indicate the plate whose corners will be chamfered
 indicated corners of the selected plate which should be chamfered (in the drawing above
these are corner 1 and corner 2)
 in the Chamfering of corners dialog box determine the parameters as follows:

Chamfering type:
adopt the chamfer dimensions as shown in the drawing below
 press the Apply button in the Chamfering of corners dialog box; the plate after
performing the operation of chamfering of corners is illustrated in the drawing below.
10.9.Bending of plates
A bent plate is an element made by bending a standard plate defined in a model. Bending of
plates is a reversible operation (it is possible to remove a bend made in a selected plate).
After performing the operation of bending, a plate becomes a bent plate in the program.
A bend in a plate may be defined by giving the information as follows (see the drawing below):
- bending line
- angle of bending
- reference surface; it determines whether a radius is defined on the internal surface of the
plate (the r radius) or on the middle surface of the plate (the ra radius)
- side of the plate to be bent.

NOTE:
Areas of bending may not overlap.
While defining a bend in a plate, the following commands will appear in the command line:
Choose method [by2Points/byLine]:
Specify start point:
Specify end point:
or
Select line:
Location of bending line [Center/Edge]
Specify internal radius or [Axial]:
Specify angle:
Pick side to be wrapped:
10.10. Insert arc - profiles

The option enables connection - by means of an arc element – of two profiles not touching
each other, lying in the same plane. The option is accessible from:
 menu by selecting the option: Steel / Machining / Insert arc
 command line: RBCS_BENDCORNER.
To insert an arc between two profiles (see the drawing below), the user should:
 select the Steel / Machining / Insert arc option or press the icon
 indicate two profiles to be connected by an arc
 specify a radius of the inserted arc
 press the Enter key.
before inserting an arc after inserting an arc
10.11. Copy connection

The option enables copying all types of connections defined in AutoCAD © Structural
Detailing. Copying comprises all the elements of a connection. To define a connection, the
user should follow the steps below:
1. select the command: Steel / Machining / Copy connection or press the icon
2. indicate the connection to be copied
3. indicate the profiles to which the selected connection will be ascribed (if all profiles in the
structure model are indicated, then the program will find all the profiles which can be
ascribed the selected connection)
4. press the Enter key.

Take note that a connection will be copied if the following conditions concerned with the
profiles in the copied connection and the profiles where to the connection will be copied, are
satisfied:
 ‘target’ profiles are identical to those in the indicated connection
 mutual orientation of profiles is identical to that in the indicated connection.
NOTE:
If a connection involves machining operations that have been defined ‘manually" by the user,
they are deleted from the elements of this connection when regenerating this connection.
10.12. Collision detection

The option enables finding structure elements that overlap. To detect a collision of elements in
the structure model, the user should follow the steps below:
1. select the command: Steel / Collision detection or press the icon

2. indicate elements of the structure model to be verified (if all elements in the structure
model are indicated, then the program will find all the collisions of structure component
elements)
3. press the Enter key.
Once verification of a structure model is completed, the program displays in the command line
the number of collisions found between structure elements (profiles, plates, bolts, etc.).
Collision sites are marked in a structure model.
The command line shows a number of collisions found between structure elements. It is
possible to save collision tests; they are saved in the ‘RBCS_Collision_Detection’ layer and
represented by AutoCAD® 3D Solid objects.

11. DRILLS/BOLTS/WELDS
11.1.Drills
The option allows defining bolt openings. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Machining / Drill\Bolt option
 the command line: RBCS_DRILL.
Once the Drill option is selected, the dialog box shown in the figure below is displayed on the
screen.
The Drilling dialog box may be divided into three parts:

 in the left part of the dialog box a user may define basic information concerning bolt
openings:
after switching on the Depth option, an edit field becomes accessible in which a user may
determine the drilling depth; if the option is switched off, then an opening is drilled
through a whole element
once the Slotted option is turned on, the defined opening will be slot-shaped; then two
edit fields become accessible in which a user may determine: length of the opening
rectilinear part and opening rotation angle, respectively; if the Slotted option is turned off,
the opening will be circular
after switching on the Bottom flange or Top flange option, drillings will be positioned in
the bottom/top flange of a member section
 in the middle part of the dialog box a user may select one of the possible modes of
defining bolt openings / drillings (the selected mode is presented in the drawing):
- single bolt opening
- rectangular arrangement of openings / drillings with a regular spacing of openings
in both directions - when this opening type is selected, the following parameters need to
be determined:
- number of rows and columns of openings / drillings (direction X and direction Y)
- distances between rows and columns of openings / drillings (dx and dy)
- polar arrangement of openings / drillings (openings will be defined on an arc of a
circle) - when this opening type is selected, the following parameters need to be
determined:
- number of openings / drillings
- radius of a circle on which the centers of openings / drillings will be positioned
- angle between the successive openings/bolts; if the Auto fill option is turned on, then
openings will be arranged along the entire circumference length and the angle will be
determined automatically

- rectangular arrangement of openings / drillings with an irregular spacing of openings

- when this opening type is selected, the following parameters need to be determined:
- number of rows and columns of openings / drillings (direction X and direction Y)
- distances between successive openings in rows and columns of openings / drillings (dx
and dy), e.g.: 50 75 50 100
below the Bolts option is located, if it is switched off, then bolts will not be placed in the
openings (all the edit fields are inaccessible); if the option is switched on, then bolts will
be placed in the openings and the fields for defining bolt parameters: diameter and class,
are accessible; moreover, the Setting button is available which when pressed, opens the
Bolt Settings dialog box
 the right part of the dialog box contains the following icon allowing definition of openings /
drillings:
- indicates objects in which the openings are to be made and drills bolt openings
based on parameters defined in the dialog box.
The dialog box opens showing the opening/bolt parameters defined recently.
11.2.Bolt settings
The Bolt settings dialog box presented in the drawing below opens after pressing the Setting
button in the Drilling dialog box.
The left part of the dialog box contains basic information concerning applied bolts:
 bolt diameter
 bolt grade
 bolt type (site, workshop)
 washer thickness; in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing, bolts are generated with washers
(NOTE: the washer thickness is taken into account while calculating the bolt length)
 bolt length; the length may be:
- Auto option: determined automatically
- Exact option: specified directly by the user
- Database option: selected or calculated based on data in a chosen bolt database (see:
Principles of calculation of the bolt length)
 additional description of a bolt.
There is the Include parts field provided in the right part of the dialog box. If an option is turned
on in this field, it results in adding an appropriate part, such as:

 one or two nuts

 washers: head washers or nut washers.
When pressed, the Database button opens the bottom panel of the Bolt settings dialog box.
It comprises a table with data regarding bolts, nuts and washers available in the selected bolt
folder.
11.3.Principles of calculation of the bolt length

If in the Bolt settings dialog box the Database option has been selected, then a bolt of the
appropriate length is automatically selected from an available bolt database.
The following data is needed to determine a bolt length:

1. sum of thicknesses of all the elements connected with each other
2. parameters of bolts:
- bolt diameter
- bolt type connected with a selected bolt database
3. parameters of washers:
- number of washers
- washer type connected with a selected washer database
4. parameters of nuts:
- number of nuts
- nut type connected with a selected nut database
If the above information is known, i.e.

 there is a database including a table of prestressed shank lengths
 databases of nuts and washers are chosen
 there is information about a recommended number of nuts and washers,
then a bolt length is selected directly from the database including a table of prestressed shank
lengths.
If not all the conditions mentioned above are fulfilled (e.g. there is no database including
information about prestressed shank lengths), a bolt length is calculated in the program
according to the description below:
1. calculations of thicknesses of connected elements EL_THICK
This thickness is a distance between the upper plane of the first connected element and the
lower plane of the last connected element. The distance is measured at the point where the
bolt axis intersects the connected elements.
2. calculations of the minimum length of the bolt shank B_SHANK_LENGTH

Once thickesses of all washers and nuts are added to thicknesses of all connected elements,
the value obtained is referred to as the minimum length of the bolt shank.
B_SHANK_LENGTH = EL_THICK + nw * thw + nn* thn

where:

nw - number of washers
thw - washer thickness (from a database)
nn - number of nuts
thn - nut thickness (from a database).
3. searching of a bolt of the required length of the shank and the thread in a selected
database; the two conditions presented below have to be fulfilled:
BSld – B_SHANK_LENGTH ³ 0.5 mm
(BSld – nw * thw – EL_THICK) - BTld  - 1.0 mm

where:
BSld - length of the bolt shank (from a database)
BTld - length of the bolt thread (from a database)
The bolt list presented in the lower part of the Bolt settings dialog box includes all bolts of a
given diameter from a database. The bolt found is highlighted on this list.
11.4.Weld definition
The Weld definition dialog box shown in the below-presented drawing is used to define weld
parameters.

Once the weld type of marking (workshop or site) is selected, the user may determine
parameters of the defined weld:
 weld type
 weld thickness (calculated automatically)
 dimension(s) for edge preparation are shown in a schematic drawing - the number of
parameters depends on a weld type.
Switching on the Intermittent weld option allows definition of an intermittent fillet weld
(composed of many segments of single wleds). The drawings below include designations as
follows:
PE - beginning of a weld
PS - end of a weld
l - length of weld segments
e - spacing between weld segments.
All segments of a weld are of the same length (l); spacings between segments of welds are
also of the same length.
The following types of intermittent welds are available in the program:

- intermittent weld – one-sided
- intermittent weld – double-sided - chain
- intermittent weld – double-sided - staggered.

12. POSITIONING
12.1.Position - definition and description
The design process in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing may be divided into two primary
stages: model definition and preparation of drawing documentation. The intermediate stage
constitutes positioning, in other words, assigning - to structure elements - the "position"
designations, which are used to identify elements in the documentation. Assigning a position is
necessary in order to prepare a drawing of a given element.
An additional objective of positioning is to limit a number of drawings in such a manner that
identical structure parts are presented in one drawing. Three types of objects that may be
positioned, have been distinguished in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing:
 Single parts
 Assemblies (only automatic positioning)
 Groups.
The position is presented in the form of an element (element group) label. The position syntax
consists of two separate parts:
Prefix + number, where
 Prefix is a short, editable text, e.g. pos, that may be linked to the element’s family (single
part, groups, etc.); this part of a name may be disregarded
 Number is saved in the numeric or alphanumeric format (it may be ascribed automatically
or manually); As a result of adopting a position number, the classification is set properly
on the list.
Positioning levels
Positions may be assigned independently on two positioning levels:
 for single parts
 for assemblies.
The process of positioning is carried out separately for each of the levels listed.
The program allows two methods of assigning a position:

 manual positioning (manual definition or modification of positions for selected elements –
single parts or groups)
 automatic positioning (automatic definition of a position for the entire model or its
selected part).
Each of the positioning levels listed is connected with the type of drawings (the template used
for automatic drawing generation): single part drawing, workshop drawing and site drawing.
Beneath there are the elements presented that may be chosen for individual positioning levels:
Single part Single parts: profiles, plates, connectors
Assembly Single parts, groups
Group Groups
There is also the Remove position option provided in the program. It is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Positions / Remove position option
 the command line: RBCS_REMPOS.
To remove the positions assigned to elements, the user should select the elements and
activate the Remove position option. Positions will be removed from all the selected elements.

12.2.Manual positioning
The option enables assigning the position manually. It is available from:
 the menu by selecting Steel / Positions / Assign position manually option
 the command line: RBCS_MANUALPOS.
In order to perform the operation of assigning the position manually, the user should:
 select an element or several identical elements
 in the above dialog box - determine the following: positioning level, position label (prefix,
number and comment - see the position description)
 press the Apply button.
NOTE:
While assigning a position manually only basic criteria of element recognition are considered;
user-defined criteria are available only in the case of automatic positioning.
A position may also be assigned (modified) any time while working in AutoCAD © Structural
Detailing by means of the Object properties option (the Inspector dialog box).
12.3.Automatic positioning
The option enables assigning positions automatically. It is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Positions / Run automatic positioning option
 the command line: RBCS_AUTOPOS.
The operation of assigning the position automatically may be performed for a whole structure
model or for its selected part. Once structure elements are selected, the Automatic
positioning dialog box is displayed on the screen; the dialog box consists of three tabs:
General
Additional
Numbering.
Pressing the Run button activates the operation of assigning the position automatically.
Positioning is performed automatically for all selected structure elements. All the positions
assigned during one positioning operation are given identical prefix and comment.

12.4.Additional
The dialog box assumes the form shown in the drawing below after selecting the Additional
tab in the Automatic positioning dialog box.
The above dialog box contains the following options:

 Identify parts
if this option is switched on (this is the default option setting), the identity of a structure
part is checked; if two identical parts are found, then the same position is assigned to
them
if this option is switched off, each structure part is assigned a successive position
 Family
if this option is switched on, then families are considered while checking the identity of a
structure part; it means that if structure elements belong to different families, then these
structure elements will be ascribed different positions; if the Identify parts option is
switched off, the Family option is inaccessible
 Material
if this option is switched on, then materials are considered while checking the identity of a
structure part; it means that if structure elements are assigned different materials, then
these structure elements will be ascribed different positions
 Overwrite existing positions without confirmation
if this option is switched on, then the structure elements that have been selected and
that have already been assigned positions, are automatically ascribed new positions
(previous positions are overwritten)
if this option is switched off and during the automatic positioning an element with the
position already assigned is found, then in the command line the message is displayed
asking if the position for the element is to be overwritten: there are three possible
answers:
No - the position will not be changed
Yes - the position will be changed to a new one
Yes for all - the position will be changed for all the successive elements that have
already been assigned positions.
If the Identify parts option is turned on and several identical parts have been found during
positioning, then a number ascribed to the element is the number of the first identical part
found during positioning. All the parts identical to the element that has already been assigned
a position, are ascribed the same position as the first element found.

12.5.General
The dialog box assumes the form shown in the drawing below, once the General tab is
selected in the Automatic positioning dialog box.
The following options are provided in the Settings field:

 Positioning level - if a given option is indicated, then the selected positioning level is
assigned to all the elements chosen for the positioning operation;
once the Single part option is selected, then groups are not considered in the positioning
process
once the Assembly option is selected, positions are assigned both to single elements
and to groups
once the Group option is selected, single parts are not considered in the positioning
process
 Prefix - the field (list) allowing the user to specify a character string (it is allowable to
disregard a prefix) that will be ascribed as a prefix to all positions; a prefix may be taken
from a family
 Number - determines the format of numbering the positions ascribed to selected
structure elements; the following options are available in this field:
Format - selection of the format for a position number (numbers or letters)
Start - depending on a selected format, the field allows defining (natural) numbers or
alphabet letters; in this field the beginning value for the position numbering may be
determined - successive positions will be numbered depending on a value provided in
the Step field
if the alphanumeric format has been chosen, then the consecutive alphabet letters are
ascribed to consecutive positions (the alphabet contains 26 letters); if the 26th letter (Z
letter) has already been applied, position numbering will assume the following form: AA,
AB, AC, etc.
Step - the field for defining a value of the position numbering increment.
12.6.Numbering
Once the Numbering tab is selected in the Automatic positioning dialog box, the contents of
the dialog box depends on the option selected in the Sort by field.
If the Sort by element shape option is chosen, then the dialog box assumes the form
presented in the drawing below.

In this mode position numbers are sorted with the element geometry taken into account. The
numbering order is determined based on selected properties of the element shape:
The dialog box above includes two panels:
 left panel containing available sorting criteria (6 element properties, that may be
considered while defining the numbering order, are presented on the list); highlighting a
line in the left panel and pressing the  buttons results in moving the selected property
up or down the list; in this manner the user may obtain the required sorting order
 right panel presents the (ascending) order of quantities defined in the program for a
selected sorting criterion (e.g. all profile types); highlighting a line in the right panel and
pressing the  buttons results in moving the selected property up or down the list; in
this manner the user may obtain the required sorting order.
If the Sort by element location option is chosen, then the dialog box assumes the form
presented in the drawing below.

In this mode position numbers are sorted considering the element location in a structure
model. Successive numbers are ascribed based on the position of the element reference point
in the coordinate system. The above dialog box allows determining the following parameters:
 in the Sort according to axes field - the user chooses whether the location of positioned
elements is to be verified with respect to the global coordinate system (WCS) or with
respect to the current user local coordinate system (UCS)
 in the Reference point field - the user determines the point which identifies the point
position in space
 from the Axis order list the user may select the method of searching the parts in the
selected coordinate system
 in the Axis sense field - the user determines if the numbering increases according to the
axis sense (+) or if the numbering increasing in the direction opposite to the axis sense
(-) is assumed.
12.7.Position verification
The option is intended for controlling designations of positions ascribed to elements in the
process of manual or automatic positioning.
Positioning is verified through searching for positions that do not fulfill (or do fulfill) selected
conditions of positioning. The option is available:
 from the menu by selecting the option: Steel / Positions / Verify positions
 from the toolbar pressing the icon
 from the command line: RBCS_VERIFYPOS.
Verification of positions is performed for the entire structure model. After activating the option,
the Position verification dialog box is displayed on the screen.
The Actions field includes several options which allow performing operations on elements
found during position verification (hide, change color / select). The effect of an action is
remembered until the Restore button is pressed or until the dialog box is closed and
regeneration is carried out.
In the Check field the user may choose elements (single parts or assemblies) to be taken into
account in structure verification.
In the Check criteria field there are options provided which enable indicating the elements to
be searched in the process of verification:
 Elements without positions – if this option is selected, then the program will be searching
for all the elements to whom no position has been assigned
 Elements belonging to position - if this option is selected, then the program will be
searching for the elements that contain the specified prefix and position number
 Find identical - if this option is selected, then the program will be searching for the
elements in conformity with the pattern object selected by the user (group or single part);
the pattern object may be indicated on the screen after pressing the Select pattern
button.

Pressing the Apply button runs verification (the options in the Check criteria field); after
verification is carried out on all objects that satisfy the selected criterion, an action chosen in
the Actions field may be performed. In addition, the command line provides information about
the number of elements found that fulfill the defined criterion, e.g.:
Position verification
Identical elements: 10 found.
In the top right corner of the dialog box there are two buttons which enable the user to run
positioning of elements found and selected during verification, if the Select option has been
chosen in the Actions field:
 Manual positioning – pressing this button enables performing manual positioning for
elements found in the verification process
 Auto positioning - pressing this button enables performing automatic positioning for
elements found in the verification process.
12.8.Example of positioning and automatic printout

Positioning will be illustrated on the example of a simple 3D frame generated with the use of
the Multi-span frame macro available in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Steel. To define a
multi-span frame, follow the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Multi-span frame or press the
icon
 determine the frame insertion point
 in the Multispan Hall dialog box, on the Geometry tab specify the following parameters:
number of spans = 2
number of frames = 2
frame spacing = 8000 mm
switch on the options: Rafters and External spandrel beams
 adopt any user-defined dimensions of the frame in the lower part of the dialog box
 move on to the Profiles tab and choose the following parameters for component
elements of the frame:
columns - profiles: C 10x15.3, family: Column
rafters: profiles: C 10x15.3, family: Beam
spandrel beams: profiles: C 10x15.3, family: Beam
 press the OK button at the bottom of the dialog box; the program will generate a model of
the 3D frame.
The profiles generated in the created 3D frame have been added to the Object inspector
dialog box on the Model tab; to assign positions to the elements of the created frame, do as
follows:
 in the Object inspector dialog box on the Model tab select all the profiles (the profiles
will be highlighted)
 while indicating - with the mouse cursor - the profiles located in the Object inspector
dialog box, press the right mouse button; select the Auto positioning option from the
context menu
 in the Automatic positioning dialog box choose the parameters as follows:
on the General tab
Positioning level: single part
Prefix: the By family option switched on
Number: numerical format, start from 1, step = 1
on the Additional tab
all the options switched on
on the Numbering tab
Sort by: element shape
Sorting criteria: family
Sorting order: column, beam
 press the Run button; all the elements of the 3D frame will be assigned positions
according to the parameters determined in the Automatic positioning dialog box; since
some frame elements are identical, on the Positions tab in the Object inspector dialog

box three positions will be created: columns c1, beams b1 and beams b2; the drawing
below illustrates the created positions and location of the structure elements that make
up individual positions
 move on to the Positions tab in the Object inspector dialog box

 in the Object inspector dialog box, on the Positions tab select all the created positions
(the positions will be highlighted)
 while indicating - with the mouse cursor - the positions located in the Object inspector
dialog box, press the right mouse button; select the Automatic Drawings option from the
context menu
 in the Automatic drawing generation dialog box choose the parameters as follows:
on the Templates tab
Column: Profile 1:10
Beam: Profile 1:10
on the Formats and scales tab
Part type: single profiles
Switch on the Automatic scale option
Format: A4 ASD
Arrange views: accept default values of the parameters
on the Options tab
Names of printouts: Names consistent with position name
Start printout numbers: 1
All the remaining options switched off
on the Bill of materials tab
the Add table option switched on
description: Standard
position of the bill of materials: top left corner of the printout
 press the Generate button; for all the positions (b1, b2 and c1) detailed drawings will be
generated; the program will create additional layouts (b1, b2 and c1) which will present
drawings of selected positions; in the Object Inspector dialog box, on the Positions tab
documents (projections of positions: views and sections) for each position will be added.

13. FAMILY MANAGER

13.1.Family manager
The option enables adding (removing) families to a project as well as modifying family
properties. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Family manager option
 the command line: RBCS_FAMILY.
Once the Family manager option is selected, the dialog box presented in the drawing below is
Basic rules that apply while defining/modifying families in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing
are presented below:
 the family is an attribute that may be assigned to a profile, bent profile, plate or user part
defined in a structure model; thus, it is a tool that facilitates management of structure
model parts
 the main goal of defining families is to collect structure elements into certain sets and put
them in order so that they are recognizable during filtering, positioning, etc.
 any number of families may be defined in a project; a set of families may be saved in a
project template (in a DWT file)
 the family may be assigned to each of structure parts (profile, bent profile, plate or user
part) during definition of this structure element (dialog boxes contain the lists that enable
selection of a family) or may be ascribed after defining the structure elements listed as a
property of that structure element.
NOTE:
The family may be assigned only to a single part (for groups or assemblies the family is
understood as a family assigned to the main part).
The above dialog box allows definition of the following family parameters:
 Name - the field that allows providing the name identifying a family; a family name cannot
repeat in a project
 Layer - default layer on which family elements will be positioned during definition;
however, it should be emphasized here, that the connection of the family and layer is not
permanent: after definition, an element may be transferred to another layer without losing
the family attribute
 Part Type - determines the type of structure element for which the group will be defined;
the family may be defined for profiles (with bent profiles included), plates or subparts ;
it should be stressed here that a family defined for profiles cannot be assigned to plates
(and vice versa); subparts created automatically during operations such as a connection

definition, are ascribed to a default family (it depends on the option selected in
Preferences)
 Color - color that will be assigned to parts belonging to the family being defined
 Default single part position prefix - field that allows entering a prefix (text) that may be
used during automatic positioning of single parts of the family being defined
 Default main part position prefix - field that allows entering a prefix (text) that may be used
during automatic positioning of main parts of the family being defined.
Defined families are available in:

 the appropriate selection lists provided in the following dialog boxes: Profile, Bent profile
and Plate
 in profile or plate properties (families may be modified in the Properties or Inspector
dialog boxes).
The right part of the dialog box contains the following buttons:
 New - pressing this button enables adding a new family to the list of available families; an
added family is assigned a default name (the user may change the name of the created
family); all the properties are adopted (inherited) from the family recently highlighted on
the list of available families (if none of the families has been highlighted, then the
properties are adopted (inherited) from the first family on the list)
 Delete - pressing this button removes a family selected (highlighted) on the list of
available families; it should be added here that all structure elements which were
ascribed the removed family, remain in a structure model without the family assigned
 Details - pressing this button results in displaying (or hiding) the bottom part of the dialog
box provided under the list of available families; the options located in this part of the
dialog box enable defining parameters for a selected family or selected families; when
several families are selected, the properties are identical for all the selected families.
13.2.Example of definition of a profile family

To define a new profile family, follow the steps below:
 select the menu option Steel / Family manager or press the icon
 in the Family Manager dialog box press the New button; the program will create a new
family with the properties of the most-recently-selected (highlighted) family
 in the lower part of the Family Manager dialog box determine the parameters as follows:
- name: Bracings
- layer: RbCS_Profile
- part type: Profile
- color: ByLayer
- default single part position prefix: br
- default main part position prefix: Br
 the new profile family has been added to the list (see the drawing below)
 press the OK button in the Family Manager dialog box.
The dialog box above also enables edition of parameters of a selected family; after indicating
a family on the list of families in the upper part of the dialog box, parameters of the family
presented in the lower part of the dialog box should be modified.

14. DIMENSIONING STYLES

14.1.Dimensioning styles
The option enables defining styles of element dimensioning. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Styles / Dimensioning styles option
 the command line: RBCS_DIM.
Once the Dimensioning style option is activated, the dialog box shown in the drawing below
appears on the screen.
Dimensioning consists in positioning the elements listed below in a 2D projection of a position:

 geometrical dimensions: linear dimensions of individual elements or elements joined
together to create an element chain, arc dimensions, angle dimensions, diameters and
radial dimensions
 symbols and names: weld symbols, bolt (opening) symbols, elevation marks,
designations of assemblies and groups (profile types, positions), etc.
 comments (additional text): variables describing created views and presented objects
(name, scale, etc.), user-defined texts.
Dimensioning is performed automatically based on the user-defined settings; it is also possible
to modify created dimension lines and their descriptions. Dimensioning may be conducted
within the edition contour. All dimensional elements (dimension lines, text style, ends of
dimension lines, etc.) are set in the dimension styles available in the AutoCAD © program.
The user may define any number of dimensioning styles. It should be remembered, however,
that each of the defined styles belongs to one of the categories concerning the type of a
drawing position (single part, assembly, group, scheme – a group of elements constituting a
structure model).
The dimensioning style defines the following:
 dimension style of the AutoCAD © program to be applied
 elements and the element projections in which the individual elements should be included
 manner of arranging elements in the drawing.
A set of defined styles is saved in a DWG format file or in a template (a DWT file).
In the above dialog box, when one of the types of drawing positions is selected in the Style
category field, it enables presenting the styles defined for this position type; after highlighting
one of the categories provided in the Style field, all defined styles for the selected category are
displayed. A preview of a selected style is shown in the Preview field. For each style there are
different settings defined for each of available element views (top view, front view, side view,
3D view).

One of the styles defined for each drawing position type is chosen to be a default style; it
means that this style will be suggested as a default one while defining a drawing template. The
default type may be changed by highlighting a style within a given category and pressing the
Default button.
The dialog box above contains also the following buttons (apart from standard ones):
 New - pressing this button opens the Dimensioning style settings dialog box where the
user may define a new style for a selected category; name of a new style and all its
settings are inherited from the style currently selected
 Modify - pressing this button opens the Dimensioning style settings dialog box where the
user may change settings of a selected style
 Delete - pressing this button results in deleting the style currently selected from the list of
available styles for a given category.
14.2.Definition/modification of a dimensioning style

The dialog box is used to define a new style or modify an existing dimensioning style.
The Dimensioning style settings dialog box opens after pressing the New or Modify button
in the Dimensioning styles dialog box.
The contents of the dialog box shown above depends on the category selected in the
Dimensioning styles dialog box; most options included in this dialog box are identical,
however, there are considerable differences in the part concerned with geometrical
dimensions. The dialog box differs considerably if a dimensioning style of disposition scheme
has been chosen.
The above dialog box may be divided into the following parts (from the top of the dialog box):
 general part - parameters defined in this part are used in case of all generated views
 part concerned with parameters of dimensioned curved parts
 part concerned with definition of geometrical elements which are to undergo
dimensioning - this part consists of four tabs (Front view, Top view, Side view, 3D view);
if an option in this part of the dialog box is switched on, then an element selected in the
drawing will undergo dimensioning; in the selection fields the user may determine
dimensioning parameters
 field which presents a preview of the style currently defined

 part that allows determining additional texts (comments) generated automatically for
views
 part that allows defining description styles and symbols - it enables indicating a symbol
that is to be created automatically in the selected style; pressing one of the (…) buttons
opens the dialog box used for defining description styles which determine the manner of
presenting a description/symbol in a drawing
 the upper part of the dialog box contains an edit field that allows specifying a style name,
whereas the lower part holds the standard buttons OK, Cancel, Help.
14.3.Definition/modification of a dimensioning style

- disposition scheme
The dialog box is used to define a new style or to modify an existing dimensioning style for the
disposition scheme (a group of elements constituting a structure model).
The Dimensioning style settings (Disposition scheme) dialog box opens after pressing the
New or Modify button in the Dimensioning styles dialog box (the scheme has to be selected
as a style category).
The following parameters can be determined in the top part of the dialog box:
 ACAD Dimension style - enables selection of the AutoCAD© program dimensioning style
which will be applied in the dimensioning style currently selected; the list contains all the
dimensioning styles defined in a DWG format file
 Distance to the first dimension line – an edit field where the user may specify the
distance between the edge of a dimensioned part and the first dimension line generated
automatically
 Distance between dimension lines – an edit field where the user may specify the distance
between successive dimension lines
 Extension of axis beyond edge – an edit field where the user may specify the length of
extension of lines outside the element edges on both sides of the element
 Invisible edges - if this option is switched off, then invisible edges of an element are
hidden in a final drawing; if this option is switched on, then invisible edges are presented

in a drawing - their parameters are set on the selection lists located to the right of the
option: line color, line type, line thickness
 Profile axes - if this option is switched off, then profile axes are hidden in a final drawing;
if this option is switched on, then profile axes are presented in a drawing - their
parameters are set on the selection lists located to the right of the option: line color, line
type, line thickness; profile axes are presented in all projections - in final drawings axes
are extended by 5 mm outside the edge of a dimensioned object
Options in the central part allow choosing parameters of an element view for a disposition
scheme (color, type of the first and/or second line, line thickness); the following types of views
are available:
 real – a real view of each element
 rectangular box – a view of each element is represented as a rectangular contour
 line - a view of each element is represented as a single line
 double line - a view of each element is represented as a double line
 column line - a view of each element is represented as a column line
 truss scheme – an element view is represented as a truss scheme
 rectangular box - group - for all elements of a group (also for elements in subgroups) it is
represented as a rectangular contour circumscribed on elements of the group
 line - group - represented as the largest central (single) line of the rectangular contour
circumscribed on elements of the group
 double line - group - represented as the largest central (double) line of the rectangular
contour circumscribed on elements of the group
 column line - group - represented as the largest central line (column line) of the
rectangular contour circumscribed on elements of the group.
Designations can be presented:

- for each element of a scheme
- only for the first and last elements.
It is also possible not do display designations at all.
Moreover, a value of shortening (in percent) of an element length can be specified.
The drawings may also include:

 Stick dimensions - distances of elements from axes in a scheme (if an element lies on
the axis, then a zero dimension is not shown)
 Level marks – level symbols, separately for each subgroup of the scheme
 Axial dimensions – dimensions from axis to axis of elements of a scheme
 Level dimensions – additional dimension lines of elements (on the side of a scheme,
near the level marks); a dimension chain from the lowest to the highest level in the
scheme is created.
If the Comment option is switched on, then automatically, to the views of a dimensioned object
a title (name) is added, which may be a text (comprising one or several lines) containing

variables or any character string defined by the user. In the bottom part of this field accessible
variables are provided - if they are pressed, then a variable is added to the defined comment
to the edit field where the cursor is positioned - a whole text of the comment is displayed in the
edit field.
A comment may include the following variables:
%%Pos - if this option is turned on, then description of a position is added to a text
%%Scale - if this option is turned on, then a scale is added to a text, e.g. 1:20
%%Vname - if this option is turned on, then an automatic name of a view or section is added
to a text
The user may set a comment in a drawing: the following can be determined: text style, text
aligning (align right, align left, center) as well as position of text in a view.
In this part of the dialog box the user may select styles for the following descriptions and
symbols (designations) presented in final drawings:
 Elevation marks
 Workframe axes.
14.4.Orientation of element views and dimensions in

a drawing
To enable definition of position projections, the following terms have been adopted:
 Front view - XZ plane of the element local coordinate system
 Top view - XY plane of the element local coordinate system
 Side view - YZ plane of the element local coordinate system
 3D view – isometric view.
The element local coordinate system for a selected position type is defined in the following
manner:
 single parts
Profiles:
X axis - along the profile axis
Y axis - section horizontal axes - identically as in the case of profile saving in the
database (for most profiles it is the axis of a larger moment of inertia)
Z axis - section vertical axes - identically as the case of profile saving in the database (for
most of the profiles it is the axis of a smaller moment of inertia)
Plates:
rectangular
X axis - along the plate length
Y axis - along the plate width
Z axis - perpendicularly to the plate plane
circular
X axis - along the radius (diameter) determined during plate definition
Y axis - perpendicularly to X axis (in the plate plane)
user-defined
X axis - along the longest segment belonging to the plate contour
Y axis - perpendicularly to X axis (in the plate plane)
14.5.General part
In this part of the dialog box the user may determine the following parameters:
 ACAD dimension style - enables selecting a dimensioning style of the AutoCAD©
program that will be applied in the dimensioning style currently selected; the list contains
all the dimensioning styles defined in a DWG format file
 Distance to the first dimension line – an edit field where the user may specify the
distance between an edge of a dimensioned part and first, generated automatically,
dimension line

 Distance between dimension lines – an edit field where the user may specify the distance
between successive dimension lines (see the drawing below)
 Extension of axis beyond edge - an edit field where the user may specify the length of
extension of lines outside the element edges on both sides of the element
 Part shortening - if this option is switched on, then long elements (these element
segments which do not include any characteristic points) will be shortened in a final
drawing; the element shortening is presented as a gap in a shortened element.
The operation of element shortening will be performed if the element segment not
including any characteristic points, is longer than a value of the user-defined minimal
distance without details; below the drawing illustrates the same element - shortened (top
part of the drawing) and not subjected to the operation of shortening (bottom part of the
drawing)
Moreover, the user may define a type of the break line when performing the operation of
element shortening; the list contains all the available line types of the AutoCAD ©
program saved in a DWG format file - thickness and color of the break line are identical
as those of an element contour.
When performing the operation of element shortening, the following parameters may also
be specified (see the drawing below): gap value as well as value of the distance to gap
(distance between a characteristic point and a gap).
 Invisible edges - if this option is switched off, then in a final drawing invisible edges of an
element are hidden; if this option is switched on, then invisible edges are presented in a

drawing - their parameters are set on the selection lists located to the right of the option:
line color, line type, line thickness
 Axes - if this option is switched off, then profile axes are hidden in a final drawing; if this
option is switched on, then profile axes are presented in a drawing - their parameters are
set on the selection lists located to the right of the option: line color, line type, line
thickness; profile axes are presented in all projections - in final drawings axes are
extended by 5 mm outside an edge of a dimensioned object
 User parts - if this option is switched off, then user parts are hidden in a final drawing; if
this option is switched on, then user parts are presented in a drawing - their parameters
are set on the selection lists located to the right of the option: line color, line type, line
thickness
 Cut parameters – pressing this button opens another dialog box, in which the user may
determine parameters of section hatching and parameters of designation of a part
section.
For styles of assemblies or groups, take note that Distance to the first dimension line indicates
the distance measured to the edge determined by a rectangle describing an assembly
projection (rectangle sides are parallel to the axes of the element local coordinate system).
When defining a modification of an assembly style there is also the Draw parts in actual
location option available. If this option is switched off, then projections of an assembly are
generated in the coordinate system determined by the main part of the assembly; if this option
is switched on, then projections of the assembly are generated in WCS (the Global coordinate
system).
14.6.Geometrical dimensions
This part of the dialog box used to define or modify a dimensioning style depends on the
selected category:
 single part
 assembly
 group.
14.7.Cut parameters
The dialog box shown in the drawing below opens on pressing the Cut parameters button in
the Definition / modification of dimensioning style dialog box.
If the Cut hatching option is switched on, surfaces seen as cuts through element walls are
hatched. The following hatching parameters can be defined:
 Pattern – a list of available patterns of the AutoCAD © program
 Angle – a list containing values of the inclination angle of the hatching pattern

 Scale – a list of scale values that cause elongating or shortening of the hatching pattern.
In the lower part of the dialog box it is possible to determine parameters of a cut through
elements: cut symbol, style and color of a text, style and color of a break line.
14.8.Dimensioning of curved parts

Curved elements may be presented on the screen and dimensioned in the following way:
Single parts:
 as standard objects using the Orthogonal option; objects are presented so that their
actual shape is shown and dimensions are generated in the orthogonal system (compare
example dimensions generated with the use of this option in the drawing below)
 as curved objects using the Aligned to curve option; elements are presented so that
their actual shape is shown and dimensions are generated in the system adjusted to the
profile curvature (compare example dimensions generated with the use of this option in
the drawing below); total dimensions are presented in the orthogonal system
(coordinate system of the curved part) – the remaining dimensions are generated in the
longitudinal / transversal system; longitudinal dimensions are always parallel to the
profile axis (dimension values are calculated along the length of arc axis, moreover, a
radius value is given in parentheses); transverse dimensions are segments
perpendicular to the profile axis and passing through the dimension point.

 using the Developed option; object dimensions are presented in the developed form in
the orthogonal system; pressing the Options button opens the additional dialog box:
Developed parts.
Assemblies
 as standard elements using the Orthogonal option; objects are presented so that their
actual shape is shown and dimensions are generated in the orthogonal system
 as curved elements using the Aligned to curve option; elements are presented so that
their actual shape is shown and dimensions are generated in the system adjusted to the
profile curvature; total dimensions are presented in the orthogonal system (coordinate
system of the curved part) – the remaining dimensions are generated in the longitudinal
/ transversal system; longitudinal dimensions are always parallel to the main part axis
(dimension values are calculated along the length of arc axis, moreover, a radius value
is given in parentheses); total transverse dimensions are determined by cutting planes
(external transverse dimensions are parallel to total transverse dimensions); internal
transverse dimensions are segments perpendicular to the profile axis and passing
through the dimension point.
Single parts
For the options: Orthogonal and Aligned to curve projections of the actual element shape are
obtained; elements are projected onto planes of the coordinate system of a curved part. The
coordinate system of a curved part is a coordinate system used only in drawings; it is defined
in the following manner:
For profiles:
If a profile includes linear segments, then the longest segment is selected and the coordinate
system of a curved part coincides with the coordinate system of this segment (as if it were a
single simple profile).
If a profile does not contain linear segments, then the coordinate system of a curved part may
be defined in two ways:
A. X axis of the coordinate system of a curved part is positioned along the chord of the
longest (among all the parts) arc segment
B. X axis of the coordinate system of a curved part is a tangent to the chord of the longest
(among all the parts) arc segment at the beginning point.
The method of defining the coordinate system of a curved part is selected in the
Dimensioning Style Settings dialog box:
 if the Align arc profiles to the chord option is switched off, the coordinate system is
defined applying method A
 if the Align arc profiles to the chord option is switched on, the coordinate system is
defined applying method B.
In both cases Y axis of the coordinate system of a curved part is positioned in the plane of part
bending, irrespective of profile rotation.
For plates:
The coordinate system of a curved part is identical with the part UCS.
Assemblies
Assemblies are considered curved if the main part of an assembly is curved. For curved
assemblies projections of the actual element shape are obtained; elements are projected onto
planes of the coordinate system of a curved part (main part of an assembly). The coordinate
system of a curved part is defined as for a single part.
14.9.Developed parts - options

The dialog box shown in the drawing below opens after pressing the Options button in the
Dimensioning style settings dialog box (the option is available for curved parts presented in a
developed form).

The above dialog box includes the following fields:

 Line of bending – the options located in this field are used to set parameters of bending
edges
 Machining presentation – options provided in this field are used to determine how to
present machining in a drawing; selection lists in the right part of the field are accessible
only when the Distinct option is selected.
The idea of element development consists in transforming the curve representing the element
axis into a straight line in such a way so that the axis length and distances between points on
the axis remain the same (see the drawing below).
In the top part of the dialog box parameters of the line of bending may be defined; this line is
positioned in the middle of each arc-shaped segment. Thickness, color and type of this line is
determined in the bottom part of the Line of bending field; three selection lists are used for
that.
The line of bending is presented in a drawing if the Draw line for radius smaller than option is
switched on. A radius value may also be specified – the line is usually drawn for small
radiuses; thus the user defines the limit (minimum) radius value for which the line of bending
will be drawn.

In the Extension beyond edge edit field the user may determine a value of distance, i.e.
extension of the line beyond the element edges on both sides of the element.
The Machining presentation field enables selection of one of the following types of
presentation (NOTE: the options below are not available in version 5.0):
 Do not draw – if this option is selected, then only profile shape will be presented in a
drawing (machinings will not be shown in a drawing)
 Normal - if this option is selected, all openings, cuttings, etc. will be presented in a drawing
consistently with the style adopted for standard parts
 Distinct - if this option is selected, then machinings will be presented in a drawing; a shape
of developed machinings will be defined identically as for normal presentation type; in
addition, from the three selection lists available to this type of presentation the user may
choose the following machining parameters: thickness, color and line type.
Curved parts are dimensioned identically as rectilinear parts. There is a possibility to switch off
dimensioning of machinings which may be shown in a drawing of a developed part. If the Do
not dimension machinings option is switched on, then all the dimension points defining
machinings are disregarded and only total dimensions and dimenions to the line of bending
are presented.
The options provided in the lower part of the dialog box refer to drawings of developed bent
plates. NOTE: these drawings present the original shape and dimensions of plates (without
plastic deformations).
The options in this part of the dialog box allow insertion of the following items in a drawing:
bending lines, angle of bending, radius (external or to axis), dimensions and machinings of a
plate.
14.10. Geometrical dimensions (single part)

Dimension lines are positioned outside an element in the following order starting from the
edge of a dimensioned element:
1. elements located inside the dimensioned part
2. drilled openings
3. chamfers and cuts
4. overall dimensions.
This part of the dialog box consists of three identical tabs on which the following parameters
may be determined:
 dimension format – for all the dimensions generated automatically in a view the following
dimension settings are available:
relative - chain – the program generates a complete dimension chain with standard
(relative) dimensions
absolute - chain – the program generates a dimension chain which begins in the
reference point; dimensions are positioned on extension lines - a dimension value
indicates the coordinate of a dimensioned point with respect to the reference point
relative + absolute - chain - the program generates an accumulative dimension chain and
on the dimension line provides real (relative) dimensions of segments between the
dimensioned points
to base – each dimension is positioned on a separate dimension line attached to the
reference point
Pressing the Ref. point button opens the Reference point dialog box, where the user
may determine an additional dimension point during generation of some dimensions
(e.g. absolute dimensions)
 overall - these are the linear dimensions presenting an overall size of a dimensioned
part; these dimensions are generated if the option is turned on; they are always
positioned along the horizontal or vertical axis (parallel to the plane of the element local
coordinate system); horizontal dimensions may be placed above or under the
dimensioned element (it is also possible to exclude dimensions from presentation), as
regards vertical dimensions, they are positioned to the left or to the right of the
dimensioned element (it is also possible to exclude dimensions from presentation);

selection of the optimal option results in positioning the dimension line on this side where
the longest edge of the dimensioned element is placed (so that extension lines on the
edges do not need to be lengthened)
 bevels and cuts - these dimensions concern all the discontinuances on element edges
(corners, cuts, chamfers, etc.); they do not pertain to drilled openings; there are three
options available:
chain - all dimensions are presented on the common dimension line; lines are always
positioned along the vertical and horizontal axes; dimension lines are presented on this
element side where a discontinuance is found - dimension lines are drawn to reach the
most distant corners (edges) of an element - identically as for overall dimensions
from edge - each dimension is presented on a separate dimension line; successive
dimensions show distances from the common point to successive characteristic points of
an element; dimension lines are presented on this element side where a discontinuance
is found
aligned - each segment of a dimensioned element’s edge is ascribed its own dimension
line which is parallel to the dimensioned segment; in the case of arc segments, the chord
is subjected to the dimensioning
 internal recess - these are the linear dimensions of recesses included inside the element
contour; there are the following options available:
inside part - dimension lines are drawn inside the contour of a dimensioned element; all
dimensions are presented on one dimension line (dimension chain) - vertical or
horizontal; the dimension line is extended to the closest edge of a dimensioned element
outside part - dimension lines are drawn outside the dimensioned element (the same
rules are applicable as in the case of bevels and cuts)
 openings in view - these are the linear dimensions that indicate positions of drilled
openings; dimension points may be positioned at opening centers or at external points of
the contour of a circle representing an opening; the options: chain and from edge are
also available (as for bevels and cuts)
 perpendicular openings - these are the linear dimensions that indicate positions of drilled
openings located in the plane perpendicular to the projection plane; the same rules apply
here as for openings in view; the options: chain and from edge are available, as well (as
for bevels and cuts)
 angular - these are the dimensions presented for the edges of a dimensioned element
that are not parallel to the axes of the element local coordinate system; the following
parameters are specified:
line with respect to which the dimension is to be determined (with respect to horizontal or
vertical line)
value of the angular dimension expressed as: angle value or edge inclination.
Moreover, this part of the dialog box contains options that enable arc dimensioning (these
dimensions do not concern drilled openings and circles):
 diameters - for all circles (not arcs), a circle diameter is presented; a dimension line
coincides with the circle diameter positioned at an 45-degree angle to the horizontal axis
 radial - for all arcs and circles, the radius is presented; circles are dimensioned in this
manner if the Diameters option is switched off; a dimension line coincides with the radius
set at an 30-degree angle starting from the beginning point of the arc.
14.11. Reference point

The reference point is an auxiliary point positioned at one of the four points of the main part; it
may be shown in a drawing as .
The reference point is used as an additional dimensioned point in generation of some
dimensions (e.g. absolute dimensions). It is positioned on one of the ends of the main part’s
edge parallel to its axis (by default the Bottom, Left point is chosen).
Position, size and color of the reference point can be configured in the dialog box shown in the
drawing below, opened by pressing the Ref. point button in the New dimensioning style dialog
box.

14.12. Geometrical dimensions (assembly)

This part of the dialog box consists of three identical tabs which allow the user to determine
the following parameters:
 dimension format – as for single parts
 overall - the option operates identically as in the case of single parts
 part spacing - the aim of these dimensions is to present mutual position of the assembly
component parts; the dimensions are shown on external dimension lines (vertical or
horizontal); they are generated parallel to the overall dimension lines; there are the
following options available:
contour
dimensions along the main axis (horizontal dimensions) – beginning and end of a subpart
is projected onto the direction parallel to the axis of the element’s main part
dimensions transverse with respect to the axis (vertical dimensions) - beginning and end
of a subpart is projected onto the direction parallel to the specified direction of
dimensioning; the reference point should also be projected on this line; if any of thus
determined dimension points is positioned on one of the edges of the main part, parallel
to the axis of the main part, this point is not dimensioned; a given part is projected on the
dimension chain positioned on this side where the edge closer to the dimensioned part is
located
axes
dimensions along the main axis (horizontal dimensions) – the point of intersection of the
element axis and the main part’s edge, parallel to the axis and the closest to the
geometrical center of the dimensioned subpart
dimensions transverse with respect to the axis (vertical dimensions) – significant only for
elements whose axis is parallel to the axis of the main element - the axis is projected
onto the direction perpendicular to it; a dimension is placed on the vertical dimension
line; if the axis of a dimensioned subpart coincides with the axis of the main part, then the
dimension is not generated
point
dimensions along the main axis (horizontal dimensions) – one of the edge points of a
subpart is projected onto the direction parallel to the main part’s axis (a point positioned
closer to the main part’s edge is selected); if both edge points of a subpart are located on
the main part’s edge, then the point closer to the reference point is dimensioned
dimensions transverse with respect to the axis (vertical dimensions) – the first (counting
from the reference point) point met on the subpart’s edge is projected onto the direction
parallel to the specified direction of dimensioning; the reference point should be projected
onto this line, as well; if any of thus determined dimension points is positioned on one of
the edges of the main part, parallel to the main part’s axis, this point is not dimensioned;
a given part is projected on the dimension chain positioned on this side where the edge
closer to the dimensioned part is located
optimal
dimensions along the main axis (horizontal dimensions) – selection depends on a subpart
type:
plates perpendicular to the main part’s axis, set orthogonally – the axes option
plates perpendicular to the main part’s axis, set slanting - the point option

plates parallel to the main part’s axis – the contour option

profiles perpendicular to the main part’s axis – the point option
profiles parallel to the main part’s axis - the contour option
dimensions transverse with respect to the axis (vertical dimensions) - selection depends
on a subpart type:
plates perpendicular to the main part’s axis, set orthogonally - the point option
plates perpendicular to the main part’s axis, set slanting - the point option
plates parallel to the main part’s axis - the contour option
profiles perpendicular to the main part’s axis - the contour option
profiles parallel to the main part’s axis - the contour option
Additionally, the following options are accessible (they parametrize the position of a
dimension line):
With overall – dimension lines are always placed on the same side as overall dimension
lines; if position of overall dimensions is not defined, then lines are positioned according
to the Optimal option
Optimal - dimension lines are placed on this element side which is closer to a greater
number of dimension points
 part dimensions – the option enables presentation only of overall dimensions of subparts;
dimensions are generated following the same rules as in case of the whole assembly;
these lines are always generated as internal dimension lines; orientation of dimension
lines is determined in the local coordinate system of a dimensioned subpart or in the
coordinate system of the main part of an assembly depending on the settings: part CS
(Coordinate System) or assembly CS (Coordinate System); if any of the dimensions
generated by the algorithm is already shown on the external dimension line as an overall
dimension, then it is not repeated
 openings in view - the options are used for dimensioning of opening positions with respect
to the element’s main part; dimensions in the direction parallel to the main axis are
placed on the external dimension line, whereas transverse dimensions are positioned on
external or internal dimension lines depending on an opening position in a part; the
options Axes and Contour are taken into account in case of dimensions transverse with
respect to the main element’s axis
Dimensions along the axis: all the dimensions are projected onto common external
dimension line which is parallel to the main element’s axis
Dimensions transverse with respect to the axis: these dimensions are placed on external
or internal dimension lines depending on opening positions;
dimensions on external dimension lines are generated for openings positioned on
transverse edges of an assembly (in endplates); external dimension lines are positioned
parallel to the direction specified for overall dimensions; external dimension lines are
always attached to the element’s overall dimension
internal dimension lines are generated for openings positioned along the main
element’s axis; they are always placed perpendicularly to the main element’s axis and
as close as possible to dimensioned openings (in such a way so that they do not
overlap with other elements in a drawing); internal dimension lines are attached to the
main element’s axis or to one of external edges of the main part that is parallel to the
axis (an edge positioned closer to a greater number of dimensioned openings is
selected)
 perpendicular openings – the option works identically as the Openings in view option;
NOTE: if both options (Openings in view and Perpendicular openings) are switched on,
then all the points are projected onto a common dimension line
 angular – the following parameters can be specified:
external – the dimensioning concerns external edges of the main part and of subparts
placed outside the main part’s contour, positioned unorthogonally with respect to the
coordinate system of the main part; an acute angle is always shown: the base is a
vertical line
internal - the dimensioning concerns edges of subparts placed within the main part’s
contour, positioned unorthogonally with respect to the coordinate system of the main
part; an acute angle is always shown: the base is an element’s edge parallel to the axis
of the main part
both – dimensions are generated on the basis of both above options.

The options of arc dimensioning operate identically as in the case of single parts.
There is also the Depth option available; it is used to determine the ‘depth’ of a structure for
which assemblies will be presented in drawings. The depth may be defined as:
 relative – with respect to a value of the ‘depth’ of a whole structure (100% - total depth)
 in absolute units – in current units.
14.13. Geometrical dimensions (group)

This part of the dialog box consists of three identical tabs which allow the user to determine
the following parameters:
 overall - the option operates identically as in the case of single parts
 axial dimensions - dimensions are generated as a dimension chain showing axial
dimensions of a presented group; dimension points are generated at points of axis
intersection (Note: for groups axes of main assembly parts are presented; therefore, axial
dimensions are determined only for the visible axes); there are three options available:
orthogonal - dimension chains are positioned along vertical or horizontal edges of the
view
aligned - dimensions are positioned as parallel to the dimensioned segment; dimensions
are not extended to the most distant points of a group; additional dimension points are
generated at the beginning and end of the group where there are no axis intersections
both - both methods described above are applied here
 assembly dimensions - dimensions present the entire dimensions of assemblies included
in a group; they are generated identically as overall dimensions for each assembly
separately; there are the following options available:
chain - all dimensions are projected on a common external dimension line (chain)
positioned vertically or horizontally
from edge - each dimension is presented on a separate dimension line; dimension lines
are parallel to the axes of the local coordinate system; they are located on this side of a
dimensioned element, which is positioned closer to dimension points
aligned - dimensions are set in a parallel position with respect to the main assembly part
(in the local coordinate system of the assembly); they are presented on the external side
of the assembly (in relation to the group center).
 angular - the option operates identically as in the case of single parts.
The options of arc dimensioning operate identically as in the case of single parts.
14.14. Geometrical dimensions (3D view)

All dimensions generated automatically are positioned in one of the (orthogonal) planes
belonging the local coordinate system of a part or group.
The following rules apply here:
For an object being dimensioned (part, assembly, group) the program defines a rectangular
prism circumscribed on the selected part (the rectangular prism is perpendicular to the local
coordinate system of the object). Dimension lines are positioned in one of the planes of the
rectangular prism, so that they do not conceal the object. The options: Distance to the first
dimension line and Distance between dimension lines refer to these planes in which
dimension lines are positioned.
Single part, Assembly

For a single part and assembly the Dimensions field includes options enabling selection of
dimensions and direction to be generated automatically.
Group
For groups the following options are available in the dialog box:
Presentation
There is a list available, on which the user may choose a method of presenting a part in the
drawing. The list contains the following options:
Real – a full drawing of a part with all details is presented

Simplified – profile fillets are ignored

Scheme – profiles are presented as lines.
Below there are lists including settings of color, type and thickness of a line presenting a
profile.
Dimensions
For groups the Dimensions field comprises options enabling selection of dimensions and
direction to be generated automatically (for total dimensions, element axes and workframe
axes).
14.15. Additional texts

If the Comment option is switched on, then automatically, to the views of a dimensioned object
a title (name) is added, which may be a text (comprising one or several lines) containing
variables or any character string defined by the user. In the bottom part of this field accessible
variables are provided - if they are pressed, then a variable is added to the defined comment
to the edit field where the cursor is positioned - a whole text of the comment is displayed in the
edit field.
A comment may include the following variables:
%%Pos - if this option is turned on, then a position description is added to a text
%%Name - if this option is turned on, then a profile or plate name is added to a text, e.g. IPE
100
%%Scale - if this option is turned on, then a scale is added to a text, e.g. 1:20
%%Vname - if this option is turned on, then an automatic name of a view or section is added
to a text
%%Length - if this option is turned on, then profile or plate length expressed in the current
project units is added to a text
%%Mat - if this option is turned on, then name of a part material is added to a text
%%Quant - if this option is turned on, then a number of elements of a presented position is
added to a text
%% Weight - if this option is turned on, then a calculated part weight is added to a text
%%Family - if this option is turned on, then the name of a family the part belongs to is added
to the text
%%Surf - if this option is turned on, then a type of surface finishing of a structure element is
added to a text.
The user may set a comment in a drawing; the following can be determined: text style, position
of a text in a view and text aligning (align right, align left, center) as well as color of the
comment text.
14.16. Styles of descriptions and symbols

In this part of the dialog box the user may select styles for the following descriptions and
symbols (designations) presented in final drawings:
 Openings/bolts
 Parts
 Assemblies
 Elevation marks
 Weld symbols
 Workframe axes.
NOTE:
The number of symbols listed above depends on the selected category of dimensioning style
(single part, assembly, group).
Pressing one of the (…) buttons on the right of the symbols listed opens the Styles of
descriptions dialog box with the symbol category selected.

15. DESCRIPTION STYLES

15.1.Description styles
The dialog box shown in the figure below is displayed on the screen after pressing one of the
(…) buttons located in the Dimensioning style settings dialog box.
The option enables definition of description styles for elements. The option is also available
from:
 menu by selecting the Steel / Styles / Description styles option
 command line: RBCS_DESCRIPTION.
The above dialog box operates in the similar manner as the Dimensioning styles dialog box. A
set of description styles is saved to a DWG format file or in a template (a DWT file) .
In the above dialog box selecting one of the categories in the Category field enables
presenting styles defined for this category type; after highlighting one of the categories in the
Style field, all the styles defined for the selected category are displayed. A preview of a
selected style is shown in the Preview field. The following categories are available:
 Openings/bolts
 Parts / Assemblies
 Elevation marks
 Weld symbols
 Workframe axes.
One of the styles defined for each category is selected as a default style; it means that this
style will be applied as a default one during manual (not automatic!) definition of symbols in a
drawing.
The are also the following buttons provided in the above dialog box (apart from the standard
ones):
 New - pressing this button opens the dialog box where the user may define a description
style for a selected category; name of a new style and all its settings are inherited from
the style currently selected
 Modify - pressing this button opens the dialog box where the user may modify a
description style of a selected category
 Delete - pressing this button results in deleting the style currently selected from the list of
available styles for a given category.

15.2.Styles of descriptions - Openings/Bolts

The dialog box is used to define a new style or modify an existing style of opening or bolt
description.
The dialog box opens after pressing the New or Modify button in the Styles of descriptions
dialog box when the Openings/Bolts category is selected.

 the bottom part of the dialog box contains an edit field where the user may specify a style
name
 the Sight view enables selection of a method of opening generation in a drawing:
Real - real opening edges are presented (openings in view and perpendicular openings)
Real with axes - real opening edges are presented (openings in view and perpendicular
openings) with opening axes
Symbol - once this option is selected, openings in view and perpendicular openings are
presented as symbols; pressing the >> button extends the dialog box; an additional part
of the dialog box contains a library of symbols available in the current file
Fill holes – if this option is switched on, then an opening for the Real or Real with axes
option will be presented as shown in the drawing below:
There are three buttons provided in the additional part of the dialog box:
Edit - opens the dialog box in which the user may modify a symbol selected on the list of
available symbols
Add - opens the dialog box used for defining a symbol; symbols are defined as AutoCAD
blocks; an insertion point for a defined block is treated as a center of a drilled opening
(top view) or as an end of the opening axis (side view)
Delete - deletes a symbol selected on the list of available symbols
Opening symbols must be defined as a pair: opening in view and perpendicular opening;
the Size field determines the size of a symbol in a final drawing, expressed in the
currently applied project units (the size refers to a symbol presented in a top view; a
symbol in a side view is scaled proportionally to obtain a specified size, however, symbol
length is adjusted to the thickness of a drilled part)
 the Preview field shows an opening as opening in view and perpendicular opening

 in the Description field the user may define a manner of opening description; descriptions
of openings are generated if the Description option is switched on;
The Text style list contains all text styles defined in a DWG format file; the edit field
located below presents a description (text) syntax; a text may comprise any character
string defined by the user - variables available under that field may also be applied -
when they are pressed, it results in adding a variable to the defined comment to the edit
field where the cursor is positioned; the following variables may be description
components:
%%Holenum - if this option is turned on, a number of openings in the opening group is
added to the text
%%Diasym - if this option is turned on, then  symbol is added to the text
%%Dia - if this option is turned on, then a value of opening diameter is added to the text
%%Boltsign - if this option is turned on, then a bolt symbol is added to the text
%%Bltlen - if this option is turned on, then bolt length is added to the text
%% Boltclass - if this option is turned on, then a bolt grade is added to the text
%%Desc - if this option is turned on, then a bolt description is added to the text
 if the Groups on common leader option is activated, then while dimensioning a group of
openings, one description (one leader) is generated for all openings in a group; if this
option is turned off, descriptions (leaders) are generated for each opening.
15.3.Styles of descriptions - Parts/Assemblies

The dialog box is used to define a new style or modify an existing style of part or assembly
description.
dialog box when the Parts or Assemblies category is selected.

name
 the Sight view enables selection of a method of generating a description in a drawing:
Text on part
Only one edit field: Text is available in which a description may be defined - the method
of its definition is identical to that described below for the Leader option. A text may be
put in a frame, whose shape may be chosen in the Frame shape field; a text is placed
within the contour of a dimensioned element (however, it is positioned in such a manner
so that overlapping of elements presented in a drawing is avoided).
Leader

There are three edit fields available: Text over line, Text under line, Text in frame; each
of them may be freely defined; the texts listed may comprise any character string defined
by the user - variables available under these fields may also be applied - when they are
pressed, it results in adding a variable to the defined comment to the edit field where the
cursor is positioned; the following variables may be description components:
%%Pos - if this option is turned on, then description of a position is added to the text
%%Name - if this option is turned on, then a profile or plate name is added to the text
%%Length - if this option is turned on, then profile or plate length is added to the text
%%Mat - if this option is turned on, then a name of a part material is added to the text
%% Weight - if this option is turned on, then a calculated weight of a part is added to the
text
%%Quant - if this option is turned on, then a number of parts is added to the text
%%Surf - if this option is turned on, then a type of surface finishing of a structure element
is added to the text (available in the Part description style dialog box; it is not available
in the dialog box for the assembly description style)
%%Family - if this option is turned on, then the name of a family the part belongs to is
added to the text
 Text style - enables selecting a font to be applied in descriptions
 Frame shape - enables selecting a frame shape for a leader; available shapes include:
rectangular, rounded or none (i.e. without frame).
Texts in leaders are positioned outside dimension lines in such a manner so that overlapping
of leaders and other drawing elements and leaders with other leaders is avoided.
15.4.Styles of descriptions - Elevation marks

The dialog box is used to define a new style or modify an existing style of description of
elevation marks; the elevation mark consists of a symbol and a coordinate.
dialog box when the Elevation marks category is selected.

name
 in the Reference base field the user may choose the coordinate system (global
coordinate system of a model or local coordinate system of an element) being the basis
for definition of: elevation reference (coordinate) and direction
 if the To main part option is switched on for assemblies and groups, then limits are
determined for a main part of the group and not for a group as a whole
 the Symbol field allows selecting one of the elevation symbols provided together with the
program

 the Mark field allows selecting a part of the element edge on which an elevation mark is
to be generated; symbols are generated automatically at the most distant point along the
selected direction; the list contains the following options: upper limit, lower limit or both
 in the Reach field the user may determine a point of connection between a symbol and
an edge of a dimensioned element: from top, from bottom, aligned
 Text style - enables selecting a font to be applied in descriptions.
Symbols are located near edges of a dimensioned element (inside dimension lines).
15.5.Styles of descriptions - Weld symbols

The dialog box is used to define a new style or modify an existing style of weld symbol
description.
dialog box when the Weld symbols category is selected.

name
 on the Arrow shape list the user may choose shape of the arrow from the list of available
arrows; a user-defined shape is available, as well
 Text style - enables selecting a font to be applied in descriptions.
The weld symbol is composed of the following elements:

 leader ended with an arrow
 line
 weld symbol
 buttons that automatically place in the active text field – the variables corresponding to
the following weld parameters: t (thickness) and l (length) expressed in mm
 additional designations.
The following rules apply to generation of weld descriptions:

 all the visible welds are given a description; an arrowhead indicating an edge is attached
to the center of gravity; the arrow line may intersect an element edge or a dimension line
 weld description and extension line may not overlap with the element edge or a
dimension line.
The Description field comprises options enabling configuration of a weld description; three
possibilities of description are available:
- as a leader
- as a text over seam
- no description (only a weld is drawn).
LEADER
The description may be positioned in the following locations (numbering of the description
locations corresponds to the numbering in the drawing below):
1. above the extension line before the weld symbol
2. above the extension line behind the weld symbol
3. under the extension line
4. behind the extension line.
TEXT OVER SEAM

A description specified in the edit field will be placed above the weld seam (any character
string with the possibility to use variables, e.g. %%weldth-%%weldlen) – see the drawing
below.
In all the locations variables may be used (as in bolt descriptions); the following two variables
of weld description are available in the current program version:
%%weldth – weld thickness
%%weldlen – weld length.
Descriptions are generated for all the welds presented in a selected projection of an assembly
or group. If there are several welds of the same parameters located close to each other, then
it is possible to generate for them one description on several leaders.
If the option Draw invisible with dashed line is switched on, then invisible weld edges
(concealed by other elements) are presented in a drawing by means of a dashed line; if this
option is switched off, then invisible edges are not drawn.
As regards circumferential welds, if in a model a weld forms a closed contour, then the
program identifies automatically such welds in all drawings; to the weld symbol an additional
symbol in the form of a circle is given in the same place as the site weld symbol.
There is a possibility to provide a line identifying a weld face in 2D drawings (the Identity line
option is switched on); the identity line may be placed under or above an extension line. It is
denoted with a dashed line of the same thickness as the extension line.
If the Prefix for fillet welds option is switched on, it enables as follows:
 selection of the a option – for weld description the program reads the thickness specified
in the weld definition in a model and enters a prefix before the weld thickness (a5)
 selection of the z option - for weld description the program calculates the value z= a2
and enters e.g. z7 as the weld thickness

If the Prefix for fillet welds option is switched off, then only the weld thickness (from a model
definition) is provided.
For 2D drawings there is a possibility to present a graphical symbol of a weld in a form of one
of the lines shown below (the options are available on the selection lists in the Graphic symbol
field):
These lines can be configured separately for workshop welds and site welds. Line thickness
and color are assumed identically as for the extension line.
INTERMITTENT WELDS
The lower part of the dialog box holds parameters of description of intermittent welds; three
possibilities of description are available here:
- as a leader
- as a text over the weld seam
- no text (only a weld is presented).
In all locations it is possible to use variables (as in bolt descriptions); the following variables of
description of intermittent welds are available in the current program version:
%%weldth – weld thickness
%%lengthofseg – length of a weld segment
%%lengthofspace – spacing between segments of a weld
%%distbetwaxis – distance between axes of weld segments
%%numofseg – number of segments.
LEADER
A description may be positioned in the following locations (numbering of the description
locations corresponds to the numbering in the drawing below):
1 = %%weldth
2 = metric units: %%NumOfSeg x %%LengthOfSeg
imperial units (USA) %%LengthOfSeg - %%DistBeetwAxis
3 = (%%LengthOfSpace)
4 = any character string.
CHAIN WELD
STAGGERED WELD
STAGGERED WELD

TEXT OVER SEAM

A description (any character string) specified in the edit field will be positioned over the weld
seam.
15.6.Styles of descriptions - Workframe axes

The dialog box is used to define a new style or modify an existing style of describing
workframe axes.
dialog box when the Workframe axes category is selected.

 Axes field includes options which enable setting parameters of workframe axes: color,
style, line thickness; if the options: Horizontal, Vertical, Radial are switched on, then
workframe axes (horizontal, vertical and radial, respectively) will be presented in
drawings; if the options are switched off, a selected axis type will not be shown in
drawings
 the Labels field contains options which enable setting parameters of descriptions of
workframe axes:
vertical - axes may be presented with labels (above the axis, under the axis or on both
sides) or without labels (the none option is selected); apart from that, to the right of the
selection field there is the Rotate option – if it is switched on, then axis labels are rotated
by 90 degrees (see the drawing below)
horizontal - axes may be presented with labels (on the left side of the axis, on the right
side of the axis or on both sides) or without labels (the none option is selected); apart
from that, to the right of the selection field there is the Rotate option – if it is switched on,
then axis labels are rotated by 90 degrees (see the drawing below)

elongation beyond element - workframe axes are contained within a rectangular contour,
in which a dimensioned group is inscribed; the size of this contour is determined by a
rectangle circumscribed on the group contour increased by the value defined in this field
(this value is added to each side); rectangle sides are parallel to view edges; it is
illustrated in the drawing below:
- green color is used to present an element scheme
- blue color is used to present element borders with a margin added on each side (a
value of elongation beyond element defined in the above dialog box)
- black color is used to present the entire workframe
- red color is used to indicate which part of the workframe will be shown and where labels
will be placed
text style – a list containing styles (settings) of fonts used for workframe description; the
list presents all the text styles of the AutoCAD © program available in the current project
frame shape – enables selecting the shape of a label of workframe axis description; the
options available are: rounded, rectangular or none
 the bottom part of the dialog box contains an edit field where a style name may be
specified.

16. STEEL SUMMARY TABLES

16.1.Steel summary tables - style manager
The option allows defining/modifying tables used to prepare steel tables. The option is
available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Reports / Styles option
 the command line: RBCS_LISTTEMPL.
Once the option is selected, the Steel summary tables - style manager dialog box shown in
the drawing below, is displayed on the screen.
The following types of steel summary tables (presented in the Table field in the above dialog
box) are available in the program:
 Material summary
 Plate summary
 Profile summary
 User parts
 Element list
 Assembly list
 Bolt (rivet) list
 Cut list
 Boly list.
For each table type the standard table style (it is presented in the Table style field) has been
defined in the program. Once the table type and table style are highlighted, the current table
view is presented in the middle part of the dialog box (the Preview field).
The right part of the dialog box (apart from the standard buttons OK, Cancel and Help)
contains the following buttons:
 Default - pressing this button restores the default (standard) table layout (description
style)
 New - pressing this button opens the Definition of new steel summary table style dialog
box where a new style of a selected table type may be defined (based on the style that
already exists)
 Modify - pressing this button opens the Modification of steel summary table style dialog
box where changes can be made in a selected table type and table style
 Delete - pressing this button deletes a highlighted table style from the list of styles
available in the Table style field.

16.2.Definition/modification of steel summary table

style
The dialog box is used to define a new style or to modify an existing style of a table type.
The Definition of new steel summary table style dialog box can be opened after pressing
the New button in the Steel summary tables dialog box (the Modification of steel summary
table style dialog box can be opened after pressing the Modify button).
The dialog box consists of four tabs:

Components and table layout
Font, color, line
Options
Sorting and detailed options.
NOTE:
If one of the steel summary table types (Assembly list) is selected, then there is also another
tab Syntax of summary line available.
16.3.Components and table layout

The drawing below presents the dialog box that appears once the Components and table
layout tab is selected in the Definition/modification of steel summary table style dialog box.
NOTE:
The options located on this tab depend on a table type selected in the Steel summary tables
- style manager dialog box. The drawing above shows the options available after selecting
the element list.
The bottom part of the dialog box contains the Style name edit field; a name of the table style
defined should be entered there (when modifying the table style, the Style name field is
inaccessible).
To define/modify a table style, a user should:
 select a set of table components (e.g. in the dialog box shown above they include: Bars,
Area, Masses, Summaries)
 in the next field switch on the components to be included in the table (the option is
switched on when  symbol appears)
 press the >> button.
The right part of the dialog box presents the defined table layout.
The following options are also available in the above dialog box:
 total table width - inaccessible edit field which displays width of the defined table -
determined in the program

 buttons: Zoom in, Zoom out, 100%, which allow zooming in or zooming out,
respectively, the table presented.
The tables enable the user:

 adding blank lines at the beginning and end of a table
 adding blank columns in tables
 exact definition of table dimensions (column width and line height) – dimensions of the
column width and the line height are presented under the table and on the left of the table,
respectively.
16.4.Font, color, line

The drawing below presents the dialog box that appears once the Font, color, line tab is
selected in the Definition/modification of steel summary table style dialog box.
The options available in the above dialog box enable the user to:
 determine a font used in the table (in the table header and all table cells): style, color and
alignment of table header and texts in table cells
 select table lines: thickness and color
 define a font used in the table title (if the Table with title option is activated on the Options
tab): style, color and alignment of table title.
16.5.Options
The drawing below presents the dialog box that appears once the Options tab is selected in
the Definition/modification of steel summary table style dialog box.

The following options are available in the Options field:

 automatically adjust row height - if this option is on ( symbol appears), then height of
table rows will be automatically adjusted to the size of symbols of element shapes
presented in the table
 table without heading - if this option is on ( symbol appears), then the table generated
will not have a header
 hide horizontal table lines - if this option is on ( symbol appears), then horizontal lines
will not be shown in a table
 hide vertical table lines - if this option is on ( symbol appears), then vertical lines will not
be shown in a table
 table with title - if this option is on ( symbol appears), then the edit field in the lower part
of the dialog box becomes accessible and a table title may be typed there; a font used in
the table title may be defined on the Font, color, line tab.
16.6.Sorting and detailed options

The drawing below presents the dialog box that appears once the Sorting and detailed options
tab is selected in the Definition/modification of steel summary table style dialog box.
When the Steel Summary table is selected, the Key for table sorting option becomes
accessible on the above tab (in the Sorting parameters field). It enables sorting the steel
summary table by: position, steel grade or section (by standard the table is sorted by position
numbers). Moreover, if the Print intermediate sums option is turned on, then for individual
elements of a steel structure (e.g. assemblies) their individual masses are specified (at the
end of a table the total mass of all elements is given).
In the Add weld mass field the user may define a value (expressed in percentage) that will be
added to the total mass (for example, if 2% is given in the Add weld mass field, then the total
mass will be multiplied by the coefficient 1.02).
At the bottom of the dialog box is the Gross weight - plates option. If this option is switched on,
then the weight of plates will be calculated as a weight of a plate sheet from which the plate is
made (without considering machinings). If this option is switched off, then the weight of plates
will be a net weight which means that when calculating the weight, all machinings of plates
(chamfers, drilled openings, etc.) will be taken into account.
16.7.Syntax of summary line

The drawing below presents the dialog box that appears once the Syntax of summary line tab
is selected in the Definition/modification of steel summary table style dialog box.
NOTE:
The tab is available only for one type of steel summary table (Assembly list).

The options provided on this tab are used to define a syntax of the first line (heading) of the
assembly list table containing the summary of assemblies; apart from the defined general
description style, the above dialog box offers access to the mechanism of the arbitrary
composition of syntax and contents of the summary line.
By switching on the relevant description components in the Syntax elements field they can be
moved to the Syntax field. The Preview field presents description of the summary line resulting
from the syntax defined. This description is based on fixed numeric values saved and
responds to changes in the preferences (modification of unit, precision).
The list of variables included in the summary line is as follows:
%pos - position
%draw - drawing number
%num - number of items
%name - element name
%len - total length
%surf - painting surface
%type - surface type
%elem - element mass
%tot - total position mass.
16.8.Example of generating and setting a table style

The example of creating tables of the bill of materials will be illustrated in the drawing for the
example of automatic positioning and generating printouts. After positioning and generating
printouts for the position b2, the drawing presented in the figure below has been obtained.

To generate a table of the bill of materials in the presented drawing, follow the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Reports / Bill of materials or press the icon
 determine the point of table insertion in the drawing; once the point is indicated, the table
of the bill of materials is inserted in the drawing
 indicate the table of the bill of materials in the drawing (the table is highlighted), and after
pressing the right mouse button select the Object properties option from the context
menu
 in the Modification of selected table dialog box modify the table, e.g.: on the Selection
of table style tab change the height of table rows and on the Options tab switch on the
option Table with title, next, in the edit field in the lower part of the dialog box enter e.g.:
Steel table – position b2
 press the OK button in the Modification of selected table dialog box; this will result in
updating the table.

17. PRINTOUT
17.1.Table printout manager
The option allows defining/modifying the printout layout for tables used to prepare steel
summary tables. The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the option: Steel / Reports / Printout (steel part) or Reinforcement /
Reinforcement table / Table Printout/Export /Edit (reinforcement part)
 the toolbar by pressing the icon (reinforcement part) or the icon (steel part)
 the command line: RBCS_LISTPRINT (steel part) or RBCR_LIST_EXP (reinforcement
part).
NOTE:
Reinforcement tables in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Reinforcement will be updated
automatically after changes are made in a drawing, if in the Options dialog box (Structural
Detailing tab) the Automatic table update option is switched on.
Once the option is selected, the Table printout manager dialog box, presented in the drawing
below, appears on the screen (the dialog box is shown for RC structure elements).
The Table printout manager dialog box may be divided into two primary parts:
which the user, by means of the mouse, selects one of the printout manager options

appropriate parameters for the option selected by the user in the selection tree; the
dialog box is updated after selecting the option by the user. The top part of the dialog box
shows the layout of a selected table type.
 The top part of the dialog box contains a few icons:
- Printout preview - pressing this icon opens a preview of a table printout; the user
may return to the dialog box by pressing the Close button
- Print table - pressing this icon starts printing a table
- Save table - pressing this icon opens the dialog box in which a table may be
saved in the format of MS Excel © program. A table may be saved to:
 *.CSV (Comma Separated Values) format files which are text files
 *.XLS format files – this saving method fully reflects table settings that can be seen
in a preview window
- Save table (MS Word) - pressing this icon opens the Save As dialog box which
enables saving a table in an MS Word file with the specified name
- Save graphical settings - pressing this icon enables saving current settings of
the printout manager
- Automatic adjust of column width to header text - pressing this icon results in
adjusting the width of table columns to the length of table column names.
- Help - pressing this icon opens Help.
NOTE:
For AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Reinforcement there is another icon available;

when pressed, it enables inserting a table into an edited drawing.
It should be mentioned here that, although a table shape (cell height, column width) depends
directly on a defined table style, the user may freely determine it (i.e. cell height or column
width).
In addition, there is a context menu available in the table; it contains the following options:
 table cells – the options: group (merges several table cells into one cell) and ungroup
 text orientation – vertical, horizontal
 adding or deleting a column in the table
 adding or deleting a row in the table.
An example of table layout after adding a new column at the beginning of the table, merging
several table cells and changing text orientation to vertical, is illustrated in the figure below; the
table presents data for a few positions of structure element reinforcement.

17.2.Table composition
Once the Table composition option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the
Table printout manager dialog box, the options presented in the drawing below are provided in
the right part of the dialog box.
For steel structure elements the user may choose one of the following table types:
 Material summary
 Plate summary
 Profile summary
 User parts
 Element list
 Assembly list
 Bolt (rivet) list.
 Cut list
 Bolt assign.
For RC structure elements the user may choose one of three table types:
 Main (reinforcing bars)
 Summary (reinforcing bars)
 Detailed (reinforcing bars) - it is necessary to select graphically the distribution varying
linearly / surface bar distribution or to enter a number of reinforcement position
 Main (elements) – see the description of the Element manager dialog box
 Main (wire fabrics)
 Summary (wire fabrics).
For each table type the user may choose a table style defined previously for the selected table
type.
Pressing the Create button generates a table of a given type based on the current element list
(if the list is empty, then a printout of a whole structure is made) in the format of the active
table style (see: Styles applied in tables).
In the List of elements field numbers of the elements included in a table are displayed.
Pressing the Selection button closes the dialog boxes and enables the user to select
graphically elements to be included in the table.
Pressing the Edit table button enables the user to indicate graphically the table to be edited.
Changes made in a table may be saved after pressing the Save changes button.
The bottom part of the dialog box contains the following options:
 Number of first page - the field in which the user may specify a number of the first page to
be printed
 Add header - if this option is turned on, then a defined header will appear on a printout
 Add footer - if this option is turned on, then a defined footer will appear on a printout.

17.3.Page setup
Once the Page setup option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Table
printout manager dialog box, the options presented in the drawing below are provided in the
right part of the dialog box.
In the above dialog box the user may determine the manner of table presentation:
 in the Titles and table lines field:
- if the Vertical lines option is turned off, then no vertical lines are displayed in a table
- if the Horizontal lines option is turned off, then no horizontal lines are displayed in a
table
- if the Print black and white option is turned off, then a table is printed with the defined
colors applied
 the options in the Center table on a page field determine how a table is to be centered
(horizontally, vertically or both vertically and horizontally)
 in the Orientation field the user may define paper orientation (horizontal - the longer side
of a paper sheet is horizontal, vertical - the longer side of a paper sheet is vertical).
17.4.Frames
Once the Frames option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Table printout
manager dialog box, the options presented in the drawing below are provided in the right part
of the dialog box.
In the above dialog box the user may determine the manner of table presentation on the page:
 no separation between a header/footer and table
 with a border line that separates header and footer from the table
 headers and footers presented in frames (the user may select a frame only for a footer,
only for a header, only for a table or combine frames of the elements listed).

17.5.Distances
Once the Distances option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Table
The above dialog box allows determining (identically as in each text editor) page margins: left,
right, top and bottom. Moreover, the user may define distances between the table frame and
header or footer.
The size of a header and footer is calculated automatically in the program; the parameters
mentioned depend on a size of the applied font, size of a drawing with the company logo and
number of lines required in a header or footer.
17.6.Colors and formats

Once the Colors and formats option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the
Table printout manager dialog box, the options presented in the drawing below are provided in
the right part of the dialog box.
In the Set colors field the color of the following table elements may be chosen: table lines,
separators, tracking lines, dragging lines and table background.
The Styles and formats field allows selection of formats and styles applied in the following
table elements: table column headers, table row headers and text contained within a table.
Pressing the Modify button opens the dialog box where the format (font, font color, alignment
method) for the enumerated table elements may be chosen.
17.7.Header
Once the Header option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Table printout
of the dialog box.

The above dialog box shows the layout of the printout header.
In order to change the header layout, the user should press the table field presenting the
header layout; then the list of available variables unfolds, on which an appropriate variable
may be selected. When the cursor is positioned in a field of the table presenting the header
layout, then pressing the Font button opens the dialog box where the user may choose the
font to be applied in a selected field.
17.8.Footer
Once the Footer option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Table printout
of the dialog box.
The above dialog box shows the layout of the printout footer.
In order to change the footer layout, the user should press a field of the table presenting the
footer layout; then the list of available variables unfolds, on which an appropriate variable may
be selected. When the cursor is positioned in a field of the table presenting the footer layout,
then pressing the Font button opens the dialog box where the user may choose the font to be
applied in a selected field.
17.9.Parameters
Once the Parameters option is chosen from the selection tree in the left part of the Table

The above dialog box contains all the variables defined in the system and their names.
NOTE:
Setting of a variable and next, its modifying must be confirmed by pressing the Set button.
The variables are used for formatting header and footer of the printout:
VAR_PAGE_NUMBER - variable that allows assigning a current printout page. A text
assigned to the variable will be preceding the total number of pages, if the
VAR_PAGE_TOTAL variable is used (e.g. if the "Page VAR_PAGE_NUMBER" value is
ascribed to the variable, then on the printout each page will be printed in the following form:
Page 1, Page 2, etc.)
VAR_PAGE_TOTAL - value of this variable indicates the total number of printout pages. A
text assigned to it may be preceded by a current page number, if the VAR_PAGE_NUMBER
variable is used.
VAR_DATE, VAR_TIME - these variables may be assigned any text and combination of the
key words presented below (it enables printing the current date/time on a printout); allowable
formats include:
%A - full week day name (Monday)
%a - abbreviated week day name (Mon)
%B - full month name (January)
%b - abbreviated month name (Jan)
%c - standard presentation of date and time
%d - month day (01-31)
%H - time (24-hour clock) (00-23)
%I - time (12-hour clock) (01-12)
%j - successive day of the year (001-366)
%M - minute (00-59)
%m - month (01-12)
%p - local equivalent of the English abbreviations AM / PM
%S - second (00-59)
%U - successive week of the year (first day - Sunday) (00-53)
%W - successive week of the year (first day - Monday) (00-53)
%w - day of the week (0-6, Sunday is denoted by 0)
%X - standard time representation
%x - standard date representation
%Y - year and century
%y - year without the century specified (00-99)
%Z - time zone name
%% - percent mark.
Standard date representation is the following string of variables: %a %b %d %Y
Standard time representation is the following string of variables: %H:%M:%S
Standard date and time representation is the following string of variables: %a %b %d
%H:%M:%S %Y.

The remaining variables listed below, do not contain other values than texts ascribed to them
by the user. Their names serve only for the purpose of convenient classification while
formatting.
The following variables linked with the printout may be used in AutoCAD © Structural
Detailing - Reinforcement:
VAR_INV_NAME – investor name
VAR_INV_ADDRESS – investor address
VAR_INV_PHONE – investor phone
VAR_INV_FAX – investor fax
VAR_INV_EMAIL – investor e-mail address
VAR_OFF_NAME – design office name
VAR_OFF_ADDRESS - design office address
VAR_OFF_PHONE - design office phone
VAR_OFF_FAX - design office fax
VAR_OFF_EMAIL - design office e-mail address.
VAR_SCALE – drawing scale
VAR_DRAW_NAME – drawing name
VAR_FILE – name of a DWG file including a drawing
VAR_DESIGNER - designer
VAR_VERIF - verification
VAR_PROJ_NAME, VAR_PROJ_NUM
VAR_REV_NAME, VAR_REV_NUM
VAR_LOGO – access path to an *.bmp file.
These variables may be also inserted when creating user’s own printout layouts. When
inserting such a layout the program will automatically fill out variables with values set in the
table printout manager.
Moreover, the following variables linked with the printout may be used in AutoCAD ©
Structural Detailing - Steel:
VAR_POS - position name
VAR_SCALE - drawing scale
VAR_PART - part name
VAR_MATERIAL - part material
VAR_LENGTH - part length
VAR_WEIGHT - part weight
VAR_PAINTAREA - painting area
VAR_QUANTITY - number of items of a given position in the project.
17.10. Templates
After selecting the Templates option from the selection tree located in the left part of the Table
printout manager dialog box, the right part of the dialog box includes the options shown in
the drawing below.
The dialog box above allows selecting templates for printing tables to the following two
programs:
- MS Word ©: *.dot format files
- MS Excel ©: *.xlt format files.

In the edit fields the user may specify file names with a full access path; after pressing the
Search button, it is possible to indicate the template file on the computer hard disk.
In AutoCAD © Structural Detailing - Reinforcement, at the bottom of the dialog box there
are additional options available for printouts to MS Word©. They allow inserting an additional
summary table including information about the reinforcement (the Attach summary table option
is switched on); it is possible to set the table either at the end of the entire printout, or for
several successive reinforcements on a page.
Switching on the following option:
 Automatic column width results in widths of table columns being automatically adjusted
to fit the length of names of table columns
 Automatic row height results in heights of table rows being automatically adjusted to
contents of table rows.
17.11. List of commands available in the printout

module
In the module that enables printouts the following commands are available:
RBCT_ACTDOC
Available for a selected document located in the option tree; the option’s task is to activate - in
the edition layout - a selected document (for its edition); there may be many documents
created, while only one of them is active, i.e. may be edited - in the edition layout.
RBCT_ADDTOPRINT
Available for a selected view located in the position tree; the layout to which the view is to be
added, must be active; the option is intended for composing a final printout; the command
adds a selected view to the current layout (printout); NOTE: a view may be contained only on
one printout.
RBCT_ADDALLTOPRINT
Available for a selected document provided in the position tree; the layout to which the view is
to be added, must be active; the option is intended for composing a final printout; the
command adds all the views belonging to a given document (not added to other printout, yet)
to the current layout.
RBCT_FITVIEWS
Available for an active document - the edition layout must be active, as well; its task is to
provide greater work convenience to the user; the command results in adjusting dimensions of
views included in the edition layout to the current size of the AutoCAD © program window.
RBCT_DELPRINTOUT
Available for a selected printout in the printout tree; the aim of the option is to delete a printout;
the command also causes deletion of the layout corresponding to it.
RBCT_REMFROMRINT
Available for a selected view provided in the printout tree; the aim of the option is to remove a
view from a printout; the command removes the view only from a printout - it remains in a
document and may be reused later on (e.g. by adding it to other printout).

RBCT_DELALLFROMPRINT
Available for a selected document located in the printout tree; it is used to remove views
belonging to a selected document from the printout; the command removes the views only
from the printout - they remain in a document and may be reused later on (e.g. by adding them
to other printout).
RBCT_DELDOC
Available for a selected document located in the position tree; the option’s task is to delete a
document from the list of documents created for a given position; the command deletes all the
drawings belonging to the document.
RBCT_EDITVIEW
Available for a selected view provided in the printout tree; it is used to switch to the edition
mode for a selected view; the command enables the user to switch in a simple manner from
edition of a printout to edition of a view (drawing) included in it; the command activates the
edition layout and a document whose component is the selected view.
RBCT_EDITDOC
Available for a selected document provided in the printout tree; it is used to switch to the
edition mode of a selected document; the command enables the user to switch in a simple
manner from edition of a printout to edition of views (drawings) included in it; the command
activates the edition layout and the selected document.
RBCT_MEDIT_ON
Available for an active document containing one view; it allows editing a document in the
model layout.
RBCT_MEDIT_OFF
The command restores the standard functionality of the model layout.
RBCT_REG_LAYER
Available for the active document and view; after adding a layer, the user may change its
name by means of the options available in the AutoCAD © program; the program manages
layers within the available views and documents; a layer must be added using the AutoCAD ©
Structural Detailing options (the problem concerns only the layers used in the edition layout).
RBCT_DELETEPOS
Available for a position selected in the position tree; the option’s task is to delete a position;
NOTE: only positions defined by the user may be deleted - positions created on the basis of
model elements cannot be deleted.
RBCT_RENAMEPOS
Available for a position selected in the position tree; the command enables changing the name
of a position.
RBCT_RENAMEVIEW
Available for a view selected in the position tree; the command enables changing the name of
a view.
RBCT_RENAMEDOC
Available for a document selected in the position tree; the command enables changing the
name of a document.
RBCT_RENAMEPRINTOUT
Available for a printout selected in the printout tree; the command enables changing the name
of a printout; a printout name is always identical to the name of a layout (printout)
corresponding to it.

RBCT_ACTVIEW
Available for a view selected in the position tree; the command makes the view of the
AutoCAD © program which corresponds to the selected view, become active; NOTE: a view
must be a component of the active document.
RBCT_ADDTEMPLATE
The command results in adding a new template; in the dialog box which opens once this
option is selected, the user may specify the name of a new template and choose one of the
registered template types.
RBCT_DELTEMPLATE
Available for a template selected in the template tree; the command deletes a selected
template.
RBCT_RENAMETEMPLATE
Available for a template selected in the template tree; the command allows changing a name
of a selected template.
RBCT_ACTTEMPLATE
Available for a template selected in the template tree; the command activates a selected
template in the template layout (it enables its edition).
RBCT_ADDVIEWPORT
Accessible for an active template in the template layout; the command adds a view to the
active template; in the dialog box which opens once this option is selected, the user may
choose view name, scale and type; name and scale of the view may be changed at any time,
as regards the type, it cannot be modified.
RBCT_DELVIEWPORT
Accessible for a view selected in the template tree; the command enables deleting a view.
RBCT_APPENDDOC
Available for a position selected in the position tree; the command allows adding a document
to the selected position; in the dialog box which opens once this option is selected, the user
may specify the name of a document and select a template based on which the document is to
be created.
RBCT_CNGSCALE
Accessible for the active view located in the edition layout; the command allows changing the
view scale; the scale is expressed as the natural number n, which denotes the scale 1 : n.
RBCT_SETVIEWRANGE
Available for the active view located in the edition layout; the command allows setting the view
area visible on the printout; the user selects with a rectangle a part of the view which is to be
visible on the printout; it should be remembered that edit operations in the edition layout do not
result in modification of a defined print area.
RBCT_REFRESHDOC
Accessible for a document selected in the position tree; the command enables refreshing a
selected document; if the element of a structure model for which the position has been
defined, changes, then the documents created for this position are refreshed; a document that
needs to be refreshed is marked with a red diagonal.
RBCT_REFRESHALLDOC
Available for a position selected in the position tree; the command enables refreshing all the
documents belonging to a selected position; if the element of a structure model for which the
position has been defined, changes, then the documents created for this position are
refreshed; a document that needs to be refreshed is marked with a red diagonal.

RBCT_PRINTVFRAMEON
Available for all defined printout views.
RBCT_PRINTVFRAMEOFF
Available for all defined printout views; areas marked with rectangles (they determine views of
the AutoCAD © program) will not be printed.
RBCT_ADDDETAILVIEW
Accessible for the active view provided in the edition layout; the command enables adding a
new view based on the active view; once the command is selected, the user should select with
a rectangle a part of the active view that is to become a new view; a view created in this
manner is of the same type as the initial view and is positioned in the same place in the edition
layout; a new view is added to the position tree; the new view contains copies of the elements
included in the selected rectangle; thus, the created view may be edited independently of the
initial view; the command is useful in the situation when it is necessary to have another
drawing of the same part to edit it independently or two drawings of different scale.
RBCT_ADDVIEW
Accessible for the active view provided in the edition layout; the command enables adding a
new view based on the active view; once the command is selected, the user should select with
a rectangle a part of the active view that is to become a new view; a view created in this
manner is of the same type as the initial view and is positioned in the same place in the edition
layout; a new view is added to the position tree; the new view contains the same elements as
those included in the selected rectangle; if the created view is edited, it also makes changes in
the initial view; the command is useful in the situation when several independent views is to be
created out of one large view (drawing) which is not added to the printout; all the views
created are assigned the same scale.
RBCT_DELVIEW
Available for a view selected in the position tree; the command enables deleting a view that
has been added by means of the following commands: RBCT_ADDDETAILVIEW or
RBCT_ADDVIEW; NOTE: the original view contained in a template, from which the document
has originated, cannot be deleted.
RBCT_SHOWIEW
Accessible for a view selected in the position tree; the command allows edition in the active
view; if additional views have been added to the document during edition, then not all the
views are visible in the edition template.
RBCT_REGMODELLAYERS
Available for the whole project; the command enables work optimization; once this command
is selected, in the dialog box that is displayed on the screen, the user may declare the layers
intended for work in the model; while working in the edition layout, layout (printout) or template
layout, the layers are frozen - it brings about optimization of the REGENALL command
operation.

18. AUTOMATIC DRAWING GENERATION

18.1.Automatic drawing generation
The option enables automatic generation of a set of workshop drawings (1 part in one
drawing); after completing definition of a steel structure model, the option allows generation of
workshop drawings for selected positions. After choosing a position, the user may obtain
automatically drawings for single parts or assemblies.
The option is available from:
 the menu by selecting the option: Steel / Automatic printouts
 the command line: RBCS_AUTOPRINT.
Once generation of a steel structure model is completed and elements are ascribed position
numbers, the stage of generating final drawings takes place. The steps to follow are presented
below:
1. select positions for which drawings are to be generated
2. select templates for drawings of single parts
3. select templates for drawings of assemblies
4. select formats and scales
5. determine rules of assigning names to files
6. run automatic generation of final drawings
7. generate a final table.
After selecting structure elements, the program displays the Automatic drawing generation
dialog box that consists of four tabs:
Templates
Formats and scales
Options
Bill of materials.
Pressing the OK button starts operation of automatic drawing generation.
18.2.Templates
The dialog box assumes the shape shown in the figure below once the Templates tab is
chosen in the Automatic drawing generation dialog box.

On the above tab the type of a part and a family to which a part belongs are defined.
The first step is to assign a single part template or an assembly template to each family. The
user has to assign:
 default single part template for profiles or bent profiles
 default single part template for plates
 default assembly template.
AutoCAD © Structural Detailing templates define a set of parameters for each view + set of
views and scales.
For automatic generation of drawings a scale for views is not taken from a template, but
defined in the dialog box.
18.3.Formats and scales

The dialog box assumes the shape shown in the figure below once the Formats and scales
tab is chosen in the Automatic drawing generation dialog box.
Fields containing scales and formats refer to an option (object) selected in the Part type field.
In the Scales field any number of values can be defined: admissible scale values are the
values from the interval 0.1 and 500. A new scale value can be defined after pressing the +
button; pressing the – button deletes the currently selected scale value from the list. Under this
field the Automatic scale option is provided; if it is switched on, then the above Scales: 1/ field
becomes inaccessible and the scale is calculated by the program in such a manner so that the
printout layout is filled with drawings optimally.
In the Formats field any number of template files can be determined. A new template may be
added to the list after pressing the + button (then an additional dialog box opens, which
enables selection of a *.dwt format file); pressing the – button deletes the currently selected
template from the list. After choosing a template on the list and pressing one of the  
buttons, the template chosen is moved up and down the list, respectively. While generating
views of parts, templates are viewed from top to bottom of the list.
NOTE:
For templates used for automatic printouts it is necessary to set the ‘Layout’ option in the
definition of the plot area in the plot settings.

The Arrange views field includes the following options:

 Distance between views – distance between views provided on the printout
 Number of views (left) and number of views (right) – number of views (sections) located in
the drawing to the left or to the right of the front view.
 Mode – the following options are available:
- single position – after selecting this option each position is placed in a separate drawing
- assembly and parts - after selecting this option all the components of an assembly are
provided in one printout
- many positions – after selecting a format, positions are arranged in drawings in such a
way so that each drawing contains many positions and all the positions are included in
the drawings
- templates of plate marking (T-line) – in this mode plate drawings will be made in the
scale 1:1 and arranged in layouts of a selected format so that the maximum use of
drawing space is ensured (positions not corresponding to plates are ignored in this
work mode).
18.4.Options
The dialog box assumes the shape shown in the figure below once the Options tab is chosen
in the Automatic drawing generation dialog box.
The Names of printouts field enables the user to select a method of defining names of files
and layouts; a printout name may be identical to the position name or the user may
determine a prefix of a printout name. Below there is an option which allows specifying a
page number from which the printout numbering will start.
If the Delete existing documents option is switched on, then during generation of drawings all
the documents with the specified name included in the existing printouts will be deleted.
In the Saving options field the following parameters may be determined:
 switching on the Folder option enables selection of a folder where DWG files containing
single printouts will be located (if the Overwrite existing files option is activated, then
during generation of drawings all the existing files will be replaced)
 switching on the Print option enables obtaining plotter files
 selection list below specifies available printout styles.
If the option Overwrite existing files without confirmation is switched on, then files located in a
selected folder will be replaced with newly-generated files.

If the option Insert projection planes into printouts is switched on, viewports will be inserted
into printouts; if the option is switched off, then blocks will be inserted into printouts.
Switching on the Start distributed work option allows division of a project into several parts
(distributed work on a document); it ensures reduction of size of a file containing project data
(quicker loading of a *.dwg file).
18.5.Bill of materials
The dialog box assumes the shape shown in the figure below once the Bill of materials tab is
chosen in the Automatic drawing generation dialog box.
If the Add table option is switched on, then a steel summary table will be added to the printout;
table location in the printout can be determined by means of the options located to the right:
 top right corner of the printout
 top left corner of the printout
 bottom right corner of the printout
 bottom left corner of the printout.
Pressing the (…) button opens an additional dialog box where template of a steel summary
table can be chosen.
18.6.Example of creating drawings (printouts)

Below is presented the example of creating drawings of a simple truss.
To create a drawing of structure elements, do as follows:

 in the Object Inspector dialog box, on the Model tab select all the truss profiles (the
profiles will be highlighted)
 while indicating – with the mouse cursor – the profiles located in the Object Inspector
dialog box, press the right mouse button and select the Auto positioning option from the
context menu
 in the Automatic positioning dialog box choose the parameters as follows:
on the General tab
Positioning level: single part
Prefix: the By family option switched on
Number: numerical format, start from 1, step = 1
on the Additional tab
all the options switched on
on the Numbering tab
Sort by: element shape
Sorting criteria: family
 press the Run button; all the truss elements will be assigned positions according to the
parameters determined in the Automatic positioning dialog box
 move on to the Positions tab in the Object Inspector dialog box
 in the Object inspector dialog box, on the Positions tab select the first position p1 (the
position will be highlighted)
 while indicating the first position with the mouse cursor, press the right mouse button;
select the Attach document option from the context menu (see the drawing below)
 in the Select template dialog box box select the template Profile 1:10 that will be used to
create documents (projections) and press the OK button; in the edition layout the
program has generated projections / views for the selected position
 move on to the Printouts tab in the Object Inspector dialog box; add a new printout tab,
e.g. A1 ASD
 in the Object Inspector dialog box, on the Printouts tab activate A1 ASD (indicate the
name A1 ASD, next, after pressing the right mouse button, select the Activate option
form the context menu)
 move on to the Positions tab in the Object Inspector dialog box
 while indicating the drawing for the first position with the mouse cursor, press the right
mouse button; select the Add to current Printout option from the context menu
 indicate the location of the document (projections of elements) in the printout layout on
the A1 ASD layout; the program has added the selected drawing of the position to A1
ASD on the Printouts tab in the Object Inspector dialog box; a part of this drawing is
presented below.


19. LINK WITH OTHER PROGRAMS

19.1.AutoCAD Structural Detailing - ROBOT link
The link between two programs (ROBOT - the calculating program and AutoCAD ©
Structural Detailing - the program used to create drawings) has been designed in order to
enable the user to:
 perform calculations of a defined CAD 3D model by means of the ROBOT program at any
work stage; calculations may be performed both for a whole structure and for a structure
part selected by the user
 apply a calculation model created in the ROBOT program as the basis for creation of a
detailed CAD model and documentation of a designed structure
 perform full synchronization of changes made in a structure calculation model as well as in
its CAD model; synchronization pertains to both directions (from ROBOT to AutoCAD ©
Structural Detailing and vice versa).
The operation of updating data of the CAD file and file containing the structure calculation
model is carried out in the Link Wizard dialog box shown in the drawing below. The option is
available from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / Static analysis - ROBOT Millennium option
 the command line: RBCS_R2R.
In this dialog box the data update is conducted for a selected ROBOT - AutoCAD ©
Structural Detailing connection defined in the current CAD file. To start with, the user should
choose one of five operations available in the dialog box:
 first three options provided in the above dialog box are used to create a new link
(permanent or temporary one)
 last two options are used for data update for a link that already exists (update of a
structure calculation model based on changes made in AutoCAD © Structural Detailing
or vice versa).
The appearance of the above dialog box depends on a selected option; in the left part of the
dialog box there appears a short description of the option selected in the above dialog box.
After pressing the Next button, the Link wizard dialog box (see the drawing beneath)
changes, thus allowing the user to:

 assign a name of the defined link or select a name of the existing link
 create or select a file with an RTD extension (a file of the ROBOT calculation program) in
which calculation results will be saved
 select objects that will be considered while creating a link.
Creation of a new link

In the Enter new link name field the user may determine a link name - this field is accessible
only while creating a permanent link. The link is saved under a specified name in the current
DWG file. The name identifies links, therefore, it has to be unique in a given file.
In the Set path to calculation data file field the user should indicate a calculation file of an RTD
extension (the ROBOT program file) to which calculation results for the created link will be
saved. This field is accessible only when a new permanent link is being created. While data is
being updated, the path is presented in the field, however, it is displayed only for informative
purposes, since the path cannot be changed. The file may be indicated, as well, after pressing
the Browse button. Then one of the below-listed standard dialog boxes of the Windows
system appears on the screen:
 the Open dialog box - when importing data from an existing file that contains a calculation
model (RTD file)
 the Save dialog box - when exporting data to a new file which is being created at this
stage.
The options provided in the bottom part of the Link wizard dialog box enable selection of
objects that are to be link components: it is either the entire structure (the Create link for entire
model option) or structure part (the options are available only when a new link is being
created). If the Select objects option is chosen, then the button becomes accessible which
allows on-screen graphical selection of objects that are to be included in a link.
Data update for the existing link

From the Choose link field the user may select one of the permanent links available in the
current DWG file; once selected, the link become active. The list of all permanent links defined
in the current DWG file may be viewed (and configured, if needed) in the additional dialog box
that opens after pressing the See list button.
After pressing the Next button, the dialog box changes (see the drawing below), thus allowing
the user to set parameters of data transfer. The options contained in this dialog box depend on
the option (direction of data update) chosen in the first dialog box.

In the above dialog box:

 for a new link the default option set is activated
 for the link already existing, these options, that were applied for the selected link during
the last operation of data update, are activated.
Naturally, before the data update is started, the options located in the above dialog box may
be changed freely.
The bottom part of the dialog box contains the Start data update button. Its pressing results in
creating a link and starting data update based on the options selected in the above dialog
boxes. Data update is an obligatory operation while creating a new link. Pressing the Start
data update button closes the above dialog box; then the dialog box containing a report on
the performed operation of data update is displayed on the screen.
This dialog box presents the run of the data update process. In the bottom part of the dialog
box the bar is displayed which shows the progress of the data update operation and the
messages appearing during the data update process are presented. Information concerning
the update includes: date of the update process, file names (source file and target file),
direction of the data update process (from AutoCAD © Structural Detailing or to AutoCAD ©
Structural Detailing) as well as all warnings that may be displayed during the data update
process.
The contents of the dialog box with a report on the data update process may be saved in a
text file; it may be done after pressing the Save log file button. A text file may be corrected
manually by the user.
The OK and Save log file buttons are available only after the data update process is
completed.
19.2.DSTV import/export
The option enables reading or saving a DSTV format file. It is accessible from:
 the menu by selecting the Steel / DSTV data export option
 the command line: RBCS_DSTV.

In the current program version two possibilities of importing or exporting DSTV or CIS/2 format
file are available:
 a file containing description of a steel structure model (a file that is compliant with the ISO-
10303-21 standard can be both imported and exported); in the File path field the user
should specify the file location on disk (file location can be indicated, as well, after
pressing the Browse button); this import/export mode results in generation of one file with
*.stp extension including description of a structure model
 files containing descriptions of steel structure parts to be applied when numeric
commands are used (the files can only be exported); in the Directory path field the user
should specify location of the folder in which files with description of structure parts will be
saved (folder location can be indicated, as well, after pressing the Browse button); in this
mode - for each part of a steel structure that has been assigned a position – a separate
file containing description of parts is created in the indicated folder. Pressing the
Parameters button opens the DSTV NC Parameters dialog box.
19.3.DSTV NC Parameters
The DSTV NC Parameters dialog box is used for definition of additional parameters of
pointing and marking. It opens after pressing the Parameters button in the DSTV Import /
Export dialog box.

In descriptions of steel structure parts, used in the numeric control of machine tools, it is
possble to provide the following blocks which are concerned with:
 header – a drawing will be identified by means of a specified text / number
 marking – if this option is switched on, the marking block will be included in the exported
file; apart from that, the following parameters of marking a steel element may be defined:
size of characters and position of the point where a description will be inserted (X margin
and Y margin)
 pointing - if this option is switched on, the pointing block will be included in the exported
file.
In the lower part of the dialog box the user may select the following parameters:
 file extension (NC or NC1)
 method of arc definition in a file for the numeric control of machine tools:
by means of ponts positioned on the arc; the arc will be approximated between the
beginning point P1 and the end point P2 by segments between points on the arc
by means of the arc radius; between the beginning point P1 and the end point P2 the arc
will be defined based on the radius value.
19.4.Automatic drawing generation - saving to

plotter
The option enables automatic generation of workshop plotter drawings. The option is
accessible from the toolbar by pressing the Automatic plotting icon.
The following parameters can be determined in the dialog box above:

 the Plotter selection list enables choosing a type of plotter file
 the selection list below contains a list of available printout styles.
Pressing the Print button starts generation of drawings by a selected plotter type.

20. APPENDIX - DESCRIPTION OF STEEL MACROS

AVAILABLE IN AUTOCAD STRUCTURAL
DETAILING - STEEL
20.1.AutoCAD Structural Detailing - Steel -
Description of Typical Structures (Macros)
The current version of the AutoCAD ® Structural Detailing - Steel program offers the
following types of parametric structures (i.e. macros used for definition of steel structure
elements):
- Multispan Frame
Geometry
Profiles
- Roof truss
Geometry
Chords
Verticals
Diagonals
- Bracing
Gusset plates
Central plate
Diagonals
Bolts/Welds
Angles
Tubes
Battens
Offsets
Strut
Rods / Turnbuckle
- Stairs
Geometry
Step distribution
Step definition
Landing
- Spiral stairs
General
Steps
Base plate
Railing
- Staircase
General
Steps
Grates
Staircase landings and flights of stairs
- Railing
Geometry
Profiles
Details
Rails
Intermediate posts
Fixing
Kick plates
- Ladder
Position
Vertical bars
Rungs

Connections
- Cage
Shape
Details
Exit
- Column (plate girder)
Geometry
Parts
Welds
- Beam (plate girder)
Geometry/Parts
Welds
- Multisegment beam (plate girder)
General
Segments
- Compound profile
Cross-section
Battens
Welds
- Special profile: castellated beam
Castellated beam - definition
- Steel grate distribution
General
Grates
Offsets
- Purlin distribution
Purlins
Brace rods
Dividing
- Brace
General
Connection to girder
Connection to purlin.
Apart from that, the Development pipe macro is available.
20.2.Multispan Frame
20.2.1. Multispan Frame - Geometry
A typical structure used to define geometry of a 3D multispan frame. To start definition of a 3D
frame, follow the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel /Parametric structures / Multi-span frame
 press the icon.
Once the point of frame insertion is indicated, the dialog box presented in the drawing below
appears on screen.

The options provided in the above dialog box enable definition of geometry of a 3D frame.
The following frame parameters may be determined in the upper part of the dialog box:
 number of frame spans
 number of repeating frames over the length
 spacing of frames over the length.
Additionally, two options may be switched on:
 Rafters – after activating this option ( symbol appears), in the defined frame the
program will generate longitudinal beams in the roof ridge(s)
 External spandrel beams - after activating this option ( symbol appears), in the defined
frame the program will generate longitudinal beams (spandrel beams) between the
external points of the frame (see the drawing below).

In the lower part of the dialog box dimensions of the frame span are defined. It should be
emphasized here, that the dimensions specified are axial ones.
After completing definition of frame dimensions and moving on to the Profiles tab, the
Multispan Hall – Profiles dialog box appears on screen.
20.2.2. Multispan Frame - Profiles

After completing definition of 3D frame dimensions and proceeding to the Profiles tab, the
dialog box presented below appears on screen.

The options located in the above dialog box enable assigning the following attributes to the
bars of the generated 3D frame: bar profiles and types of bar families.
Attributes are assigned separately to individual frame elements: columns, rafters and spandrel
beams (these last two categories are of importance, if on the previous tab the options Rafters
and Spandrel beams have been selected).
Profiles available on the selection list for each type of the frame element are the profiles
defined in the Profile List dialog box. To add a profile to the list of available profiles, press the
button; it opens the Profile List dialog box where a selected profile may
be added to the list of available profiles.
Profile families available on the selection list for each type of the frame element are the
families defined in the Family Manager dialog box. To add a family to the list of available
types, press the button; it opens the Family Manager dialog box, in
which a family may be added to the list.
The following buttons are located at the bottom of the dialog box:
 Apply – after pressing this button, the 3D frame defined in the dialog box is generated on
screen without closing the 3D Frame - Multispan Hall dialog box; it allows checking
whether the 3D frame has been generated correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the 3D frame defined in the dialog box and
closing the 3D Frame - Multispan Hall dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of a 3D frame is no longer
visible on screen; to restore the dialog box display on screen, press the Esc key on the
keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating a 3D frame.
20.2.3. Example of 3D Frame Definition

To define a 3D frame, follow the instructions below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Multi-span frame or press the
icon
 determine the insertion point of a 3D frame – this is a bottom node of the left column of
the first frame (see the drawing of the frame below)
 in the Multispan Hall dialog box on the Geometry tab determine the following
parameters:
number of spans = 3
number of frames = 4
frame spacing = 240 in.
switch on the options: Rafters and External spandrel beams
 adopt the frame dimensions as shown in the drawing below

 move on to the Profiles tab and select the following parameters for the component
elements of the frame:
columns - profiles: C10x15.3, family: Profile
rafters: profiles: C10x15.3, family: Profile
spandrel beams: profiles: C10x15.3, family: Profile
 press the OK button at the bottom of the dialog box; a drawing of the generated frame is
presented below.
20.3.Roof Truss
20.3.1. Roof Truss - Geometry
A typical structure used to define geometry of a roof truss. To start definition of a truss, follow
the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel /Parametric structures / Roof truss
 press the icon.
After indicating support points of a truss (the left and the right supports), the dialog box
presented in the drawing below appears on screen.

Considering the position of a bar in a truss, six groups of bars can be distinguished (see the
drawing below):
- lower chord
- upper chord
- extreme diagonals
- remaining diagonals
- extreme verticals
- remaining verticals.
NOTE:
A number of extreme verticals and extreme diagonals is defined by the user on the
appropriate tabs of the dialog box.
The following profiles can be defined for the above-mentioned bars of a truss:
- upper chord: I-section, T-section, rectangular pipe, round pipe
- lower chord: as for the upper chord and C-section positioned horizontally (rotated)
- diagonals and verticals: angle, C-section, I-section, T-section, rectangular pipe, round pipe.
The options provided in the above dialog box enable definition of geometry of a plane truss.
In the upper part of the dialog box the following types of truss shapes are available (see the
drawing below):
1. rectangular
2. triangular
3. bi-trapezoidal
4. bi-trapezoidal - truncated.
In the lower part of the dialog box the following geometric parameters have to be specified for
the truss types (see the drawing below):
 truss height h
 height d (at the support points for the 3rd and 4th shape types)
 number of truss fields.
Truss length L results from the positions of the defined support nodes of a truss.

It should be added here, that the specified dimensions are truss dimensions measured to axis.
After completing definition of truss dimensions and moving on to the Chords tab the Truss -
chords dialog box appears on screen.
20.3.2. Roof Truss - Chords

After completing definition of truss dimensions and moving on to the Upper chord or Lower
chord tab, the dialog box presented below appears on screen.
bars of chords of the generated truss: bar profiles and types of bar families. In addition, it is
possible to determine the method of positioning profiles.
For the upper and the lower chords the Profile rotation field is also available, wherein the
method of profile positioning can be determined (horizontally or vertically – it refers only to I-
sections and rectangular pipes) – see the drawing below.
Apart from that, the following options are located below:

 Mirror – enables defining a position of some asymmetric profiles with respect to the
horizontal plane; two positions are possible: top and bottom (see the drawing below)

 Profile location in relation to plate - enables defining a position of a profile with respect to
the gusset plate in the truss node (at the front of the plate, at the back of the plate, at the
center of the gusset plate); profiles are fixed to the gusset plate by welding one of the
walls to the plate (positions at the back and at the front) or by setting a bar in position onto
the plate after notching the profile beforehand (position – center).
Profiles available on the selection lists for each type of the truss element are the profiles
button in the upper part of the dialog box; it opens the Profile List dialog box where a
selected profile may be added to the list of available profiles.
Profile families available on the selection lists for each type of the truss element are the
families defined in the Family Manager dialog box. To add a family to the list of available
types, press the button in the upper part of the dialog box; it opens the Family
Manager dialog box, in which a family may be added to the list.
20.3.3. Roof Truss - Verticals

After finishing definition of truss dimensions and moving on to the Extreme verticals or
Remaining verticals tab, the dialog box shown below appears on the screen.

The options located in the above dialog box enable assigning the following attributes to
verticals: bar profiles and types of bar families. For verticals the Profile rotation field is also
available, wherein the method of profile positioning can be determined (horizontally or
vertically – it refers only to I-sections and rectangular pipes) – see the drawing below.

walls to the plate (positions at the back and at the front) or by setting a bar in position onto
the plate after notching the profile beforehand (position – center).
For the remaining verticals the program also offers an option that is used to determine the
method of positioning asymmetric profiles; two methods of positioning such profiles are
enabled: one side or front-back alternately – see the drawing below.
families defined in the Family Manager dialog box. To add a family to the list, press the
button in the upper part of the dialog box; it opens the Family Manager dialog box, in
20.3.4. Roof Truss - Diagonals

After finishing definition of truss dimensions and moving on to the Extreme diagonals or
Remaining diagonals tab, the dialog box shown below appears on the screen.

bars of diagonals of a generated truss: bar profiles and types of bar families. For diagonals the
Profile rotation field is also available, wherein the method of profile positioning can be
determined (horizontally or vertically – it refers only to I-sections and rectangular pipes) – see
the drawing below.

walls to the plate (positions at the back and at the front) or by setting a bar in position
onto the plate after notching the profile beforehand (position – center).

For the remaining diagonals the program also offers an option that is used to determine the
method of positioning asymmetric profiles; two methods of positioning such profiles are
enabled: one side or front-back alternately – see the drawing below.
families defined in the Family Manager dialog box. To add a family to the list, press the
button in the upper part of the dialog box; it opens the Family Manager dialog box, in
At the bottom of the dialog box is the Use template selection field, which contains user-defined
templates (schemes) of trusses. After defining truss geometry, it is possible to save these
settings by typing a name in the Use template field and pressing the Save as template button.
In future, after starting definition of a truss and after selecting the name of a saved template,
all the parameters in the dialog box will be set exactly as they have been saved in the
template.
 Apply – after pressing this button, the truss defined in the dialog box is generated on
screen without closing the Plane truss dialog box; it allows checking whether the truss
has been generated correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the truss defined in the dialog box and
closing the Plane truss dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for truss definition is no longer visible on
screen; to restore the dialog box display on screen, press the Esc key on the keyboard
 Close - pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating a truss.
20.4.Bracing
20.4.1. Bracing Definition - Principles
To start definition of bracing parameters, geometry of a bracing (position within the
structure) should be defined. In order to generate a bracing, it is necessary to define the
following elements:
 one or two bracing auxiliary lines (these lines are drawn by the user applying the menu
option Draw / Line of the AutoCAD © program) – the lines defining a plane in which the
bracing will be positioned (in the drawing below the bracing plane and bracing auxiliary
lines are marked in red color); NOTE: if only one auxiliary line of the bracing is
determined, then the other bracing diagonal will be a symmetrical reflection of the
diagonal defined by the first bracing auxiliary line.

 first column, second column – elements connected with the bracing (see the drawing
above)
 limitations – all the top or bottom limits of the bracing (e.g. the beam in the drawing
above).
For example, to define the bracing shown in red color in the left part of the drawing below,
determine the elements presented in the right part of this drawing.
NOTE:
The order in which columns and auxiliary lines are selected has effect on the bracing model.
The point of intersection of the axis of the first column and the first auxiliary line is regarded as
the reference point of the bracing.
20.4.2. Bracing - Gusset Plates

A typical structure used to define geometry of steel structure bracing. To start definition of the
bracing, follow the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel /Parametric structures / Bracing
 press the icon.
After indicating auxiliary lines of the bracing (they determine the plane in which the bracing will
be positioned), two columns between which the bracing will be generated as well as the

limitations, i.e. elements to be considered while shaping gusset plates (e.g. a beam being the
top limit of the bracing), the dialog box presented in the drawing below appears on screen.
NOTE:
The present program version allows defining a bracing in an inclined plane which is not
parallel to the main plane of the bracing.
The options in the dialog box presented above enable definition of geometry of gusset plates
at the columns.
In the upper part of the dialog box three types of the gusset plate are available:
-1 rectangular plate
-2 optimized plate
-3 plate.

For the first type of a gusset plate (rectangular plate) there is also the Chamfer option
available; if this option is switched on, then a plate created will be chamfered (see the drawing
below).
A gusset plate can be generated automatically (the Automatic option is switched on); if the
Automatic option is switched off, all dimensions of the plate will be defined by the user; the edit
fields for defining plate dimensions become available then (a number of edit fields depends on
a selected plate type).
Below parameters of a selected type of the gusset plate can be determined:

 material from which the plate is made
 family to which the plate should belong; plate families available on the selection list are
the families defined in the Family Manager dialog box. To add a new family to the list of
available types, press the button; it opens the Family Manager dialog box, in
which a plate family may be added to the list.
 plate thickness
 distance D from the edge of the bracing profile (see the drawing below)
 distance D of the bracing end to the intersection of the axes (see the drawing below)
 value of the chamfer b - see the drawing in the dialog box

 plate width w – this option is available only to the third type of the gusset plate.
The options in the lower part of the dialog box enable determining the position of the gusset
plate in relation to the working plane (i.e. to the axis of the column profile); there are three
possibilities available:
 gusset plate is positioned in front of the plane
 gusset plate is positioned in plane (within the plane)
 gusset plate is positioned behind the plane.

Moreover, it is possible to specify values of offset of the defined bracing plane (in the Offset of
bracing plane field); if an offset value differs from zero, then a bracing (together with all its
elements) is shifted by the given value.
After defining parameters of gusset plates and moving on to the Diagonals tab, the Bracing -
Diagonals dialog box appears on screen.
20.4.3. Bracing - Central Plate

Options provided on this tab allow defining parameters of a central plate (at the place where
elements of a bracing are connected). After selecting the Central plate tab, the dialog box
shown in the drawing below appears on the screen.
In the upper part of the dialog box there are three possibilities of selecting a central plate:
-1 rectangular plate
-2 optimized plate

-3 no central plate.
Below the user may determine parameters of a selected type of a central plate:
 - material a plate is made of
 - family to which a plate should belong; Plate families available on the selection list are the
families defined in the Family Manager dialog box. To add a new family to the list of
available families, press the button; it opens the Family Manager dialog box where
a family of plates may be added to the list
 plate thickness.
After defining parameters of a central plate and moving on to the Diagonals tab, the Bracing -
Diagonals dialog box appears on the screen.
20.4.4. Bracing - Diagonals

The options presented on this tab enable definition of diagonal parameters. Once the
Diagonals tab is selected, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on screen.

The options in the above dialog box allow definition of diagonal (bracing) parameters.
The upper part of the dialog box holds the Crossed bracing option; after switching on this
option, the bracings are generated as crossed ones (two crossing diagonals are generated); if
this option is switched off, then only one diagonal is generated (see the drawing below).
crossed bracing not-crossed bracing
Options in the upper part of the dialog box are used to specify parameters of the diagonal
profiles:
 type of the profile of which the diagonals will be made; profiles available on the selection
list are the profiles defined in the Profile List dialog box. To add a profile to the list of
available profiles, press the button; it opens the Profile List dialog box where a
selected profile may be added to the list of available profiles; NOTE: if a tubular profile is
selected from the list of available diagonal profiles, then the Tubes tab becomes
accessible in the Bracing dialog box
 profile family to which the diagonals will belong; families available on the selection list are
the families defined in the Family Manager dialog box; to add a family to the list of
available families, press the button; it opens the Family Manager dialog box, in
which a family may be added to the list
 type of the diagonal cross-section; the following options are available:
single – a diagonal consists of one profile
double - a diagonal consists of two profiles (e.g. angles); there are two possible ways in
which the angles may be positioned with respect to each other:
- angles with legs back to back
- angles positioned corner to corner (the Corner to corner angles

option is activated)
four leg - a diagonal consists of four profiles (angles)
NOTE:
For diagonals with a double or four-leg profile the Battens option is available; once it is
activated, the Battens tab becomes accessible in the Bracing dialog box; this tab holds options
which enable defining parameters of battens for built-up diagonals.
The middle part of the dialog box includes options used to determine the position of diagonals
in relation to each other and to the gusset plate:
 first diagonal in front of the plate
 first diagonal behind the plate

 types of mutual positioning of diagonals:
- both diagonals cut
- first diagonal cut
- first diagonal continuous
- passing diagonals
- passing diagonals (with plate)
- first diagonal cut (with plate)
- first diagonal continuous (with plate)
- first diagonal cut with gusset
- first diagonal continuous with gusset

 parameters of mutual positioning of diagonals (values are presented symbolically in
drawings of individual types of diagonal positioning):
- shortening s (inaccessible to passing diagonals)
- plate width w (accessible only to the last two types of diagonal positioning).

Options in the lower part of the dialog box are used to determine the position of diagonals with
respect to the bracing system line (bracing plane); diagonals can be set as follows:
 in the middle – in the center line of the leg of a diagonal profile
 in the diagonal axis
 marking line T – this is a line on which bolts will be positioned; the line is determined by
the value T (the distance from the profile edge).
The options Rotation angle and Mirror enable obtaining the proper position of the diagonal
profile in relation to the bracing plane.
After defining parameters of diagonals and moving on to the Bolts/Welds tab, the Bracing -
Bolts/Welds dialog box appears on screen.
20.4.5. Bracing - Bolts/Welds

This tab is used for defining parameters of connectors (bolts or welds). Once the Bolts/Welds
tab is selected, the dialog box shown in the drawing below is displayed on screen.
Options in the upper part of the dialog box enable selection of the connection type to be used
in the defined bracing:
- bolts
- welds.

Depending on the selection made, the options required to determine the connection
parameters become accessible in the dialog box.
For the welded connection, define the following parameters:

- type and thickness of welds for gusset plates
- type and thickness of welds for diagonal profiles.
When defining the bolted connection, determine the parameters as follows:

 bolt parameters:
- diameter and grade of a bolt; pressing the Settings button opens the Bolt settings
dialog box
- number of bolts
- distance h1 (see the drawing below); this parameter may be defined as a multiple of the
bolt diameter (the x bolt diam. option is activated)
- bolt spacing (see the drawing below); this parameter may be defined as a multiple of
the bolt diameter (the x bolt diam. option is activated)
- distance h2 (see the drawing below); this parameter may be defined as a multiple of the
bolt diameter (the x bolt diam. option is activated)
- switching on the Slotted option allows definition of oval bolt openings (in diagonals);
additionally, it is possible to define a rotation angle for an opening (with respect to the
diagonal angle); if the Slotted option is switched off, then bolt openings will be round
 location of openings in the diagonal profile

- in the diagonal central line
- in the diagonal axis
- in the T-line; a value of the T parameter (i.e. the distance from the profile leg) has to be
specified.
Once parameters of connectors are defined, it is also possible to determine parameters of

tubes and battens (depending on the options selected on the earlier tabs of the Bracing dialog
box).
20.4.6. Bracing - Angles

The options provided on this tab allow defining parameters of connecting angles. After
selecting the Angles tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the screen.

If the Generate angles option is switched off, it means that angles will not be generated.
Switching on the Generate angles option enables generation of angles connecting a plate with
a column.
The following options are accessible in the upper part of the dialog box:
- type of connection of an angle with the column and the plate (bolted or welded)
- angle profile
- family to which an angle should belong.
Profiles available on the selection list are the profiles defined in the Profile List dialog box. To
add a profile to the list of available profiles, press the button; it opens the Profile list
dialog box where a selected profile may be added to the list of available profiles.
Profile families available on the selection list are the families defined in the Family Manager
dialog box. To add a family to the list, press the button; it opens the Family Manager
dialog box where a family may be added to the list.
The options in this part of the dialog box are also used to determine the location of an angle; it
is necessary to define an angle length and angle distance to the plate edge; there are also two
possibilities of angle orientation available:
- an angle is fixed to the column by its longer arm
- an angle is fixed to the plate by its longer arm.

Below, the following parameters of the angle connection with the plate and the column can be
given (these fields are accessible only then if a bolted angle-column/plate connection is
selected):
- vertical and horizontal spacing of bolts
- distances of bolt openings in the angle from the plate edge.
At the bottom of the dialog box there are lists for selection of bolt parameters (bolt diameter
and grade) separately for the fixing to a column and separately for the fixing to a plate;
pressing the Settings button opens the Bolt settings dialog box.
20.4.7. Bracing - Tubes

The Tubes tab is accessible in the Bracing dialog box if a tubular profile is selected on the
Diagonals tab. The options located on this tab are used to determine parameters of a
connection between diagonals of tubular profile and a gusset plate.
Options in the upper part of the dialog box allow selection of the type of connection between a
diagonal of tubular profile and a gusset plate:
- hollow section (cut tubes)
- section with Tee plate.

For the connection with the use of cut tubes (a hollow section), determine the parameters as
follows (see the drawing below):
 plate length d1
 distance d2
 plate width w
 plate thickness t – the same thickness as for gusset plates is applied.
Moreover, a sealing plate may be created if the Generate option is switched on. It is possible
to select one of the available two types of a sealing plate:
- rectangular
- circular.
For the connection with the use of a Tee plate, determine the parameters as follows (see the
drawing below):
 plate length d1
 plate width w
 diameter of the frontal plate of circular shape d2
 plate thickness t - the same thickness as for gusset plates is applied.
Moreover, a closing plate may be created. It is possible to select one of the available two
types of a closing plate:
- rectangular
- circular.
20.4.8. Bracing - Battens

The Battens tab is accessible in the Bracing dialog box if the Battens option is activated on
the Diagonals tab. The options located on this tab are used to determine parameters of
battens between the legs of diagonal profiles.

The following connection types applied in battens can be chosen in the upper part of the
dialog box:
- bolted
- welded.
In this part of the dialog box it is also possible to select the following method of batten
definition:
- by specifying a number of battens (see the drawing below); the plate-to-plate distance Lc is
divided into n equal parts

- by specifying the distance between battens (see the drawing below); two parameters are
defined for each batten: distance from gusset plate d1 and distance between battens d2.
A batten is made of a flat profile of dimensions (length l and width w) specified in the Batten
size field.
20.4.9. Bracing - Offsets

The Offsets tab is accessible in the Bracing dialog box only then if during definition of a
bracing (upper and/or lower) limitations are not selected. The options located on this tab are
used to determine values of offsets. After moving on to the Offsets tab, the following dialog
box appears on the screen.

In the above dialog box it is possible to specify values of offset of the bracing axis at each
point of the connection between the bracing and a column. The following principle has been
adopted: the offset upwards is positive, whereas the offset downwards is negative.
A value of the offset of the entire bracing plane (all components of the bracing) can be
specified at the bottom of the dialog box. The following rule of signing this parameter is
adopted:
- positions of the following two points are assumed:
= a point of intersection of the axes of the first column and first auxiliary line
= a point of intersection of the axes of the second column and second auxiliary line
- a vector perpendicular to this line is determined
- the offset compatible with the vector (compatible with the dextrorotatory rotation) is given the
sign +.
20.4.10. Bracing - Strut

The options provided on this tab enable generation of a strut. After moving on to the Strut tab,
the following dialog box appears on the screen.
If the Generate strut option is switched off, the program will not generate a strut.
After the Generate strut option is switched on, it is possible to generate the strut between
selected bars in a structure. While generating the strut, the following structure elements are
created:
- horizontal profile
- connector plate
- bolts or welds.

NOTE:
The elements mentioned can be created if any bracing limitations have not been selected.
The axis of a strut profile is determined by the positions of points 1 and 2 in the main bracing
plane. Point 1 is the point of intersection of the axis of column 1 and the second auxiliary line
of a bracing, whereas point 2 is the point of intersection of the axis of column 2 and the first
auxiliary line (see the drawing below).
The following options are accessible in the upper part of the dialog box:
- strut profile; the following profile types can be chosen: round or rectangular pipes
- family to which the strut profile should belong.
add a profile to the list of available profiles, press the button; it opens the Profile List
dialog box, in which a family may be added to the list.
Two types of the strut-gusset plate connection are available in the program:
- by means of a hollow section (cut tube)

Moreover, a sealing plate may be created if the Generate option is switched on. It is possible
to select one of the available two types of a sealing plate:
= rectangular
= circular.
- by means of a Tee plate.

Moreover, a closing plate may be created. It is possible to select one of the available two
types of a closing plate:
= rectangular
= circular.
For the both connection types appropriate dimensions should be defined in the Strut fixing
field.
In the lower part of the dialog box there is a possibility to determine a position of the connector
plate with respect to the gusset plate (at the front or behind the gusset plate).
20.4.11. Bracing - Rods / Turnbuckle

The tabs Rods and Turnbuckle are available in the Bracing dialog box if a solid profile (e.g.
ROND 20) is selected on the Diagonals tab. Options provided on this tab allow defining
parameters of a connection of rods and parameters of generation of a turnbuckle.
The Rods tab
Options in the upper part of the dialog box enable selecting a connection type:
- fixing to gusset plate
- fixing to column web.
1. Fixing to gusset plate

For a connection by means of cut tubes the following parameters should be defined (see the
drawing below):
 plate length d1
 distance d2

 plate width w
 plate thickness t - the same thickness as for gusset plates is used.
 position of a rod with respect to the plate.
2. Fixing to column web

In the case of fixing to the column web, the following parameters of the sleeve should be
defined: profile and family.
add a profile to the list of available profiles, the user should press the button; it opens
the Profile list dialog box where a selected profile may be added to the list of available profiles.
dialog box. To add a family to the list, the user should press the button; it opens the
Family Manager dialog box where a family may be added to the list.
Moreover, the parameters listed below should be determined:
 diameters: d1 and d2
 distances l1 and l2
 parameters of a nut and a washer.
The Turnbuckle tab

If the Generate turnbuckle option is switched off, it means that a turnbuckle will not be
generated.
The Generate turnbuckle option switched on allows generating a turnbuckle and defining
parameters of a connection.
The following options are available in the upper part of the dialog box:
- database that a turnbuckle is taken from
- turnbuckle name (type).
In the lower part of the dialog box it is possible to specify dimensions that determine a position
of a turnbuckle.
At the bottom of the dialog box are the following buttons:

 Apply – after pressing this button, the defined bracings are generated on screen without
closing the Bracing dialog box; it allows checking if the bracings have been generated
correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the defined bracings and closing the
Bracing dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of bracing is no longer visible
on screen; to restore the dialog box display on screen, press the Esc key on the
keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating the bracing.
20.4.12. Example of Frame Bracing Definition
NOTE:
Bracings have been defined in the 3D frame, definition of which is presented in the topic
Example of frame definition.
To define bracings in a 3D frame, follow the instructions below:

 open a project with a defined frame (see example of frame definition)
 draw an auxiliary line of the frame bracing (use the standard option Draw / Line of the
AutoCAD © program) – see the drawing below (since both columns are of equal height,
the other diagonal will be a mirror reflection of the diagonal positioned on the defined
auxiliary line)
 select the menu command: Steel /Parametric structures / Bracing or press the icon
 indicate elements determining the position of frame bracings - see the drawing below

 in the Bracing dialog box on the Gusset plates tab select the following parameters of
gusset plates:
- gusset plate type: Plate
- parameters and dimensions of the gusset plate: material - Steel, family - Plate,
thickness d = 0.5 in., distance = 2 in, plate width = 2 in.
- gusset plate position: center
 on the Central plate tab assume default values of the plate parameters
 move to the Diagonals tab and determine the following parameters of diagonals:
- switch on the Crossed bracing option
- diagonal profile: LP 3.5x3.5x0.25; family: Profile
- select the Double option (double-leg profile of diagonals) and switch on the Battens
option
- select the location of diagonals in relation to gusset plate: First diagonal in front of the
plate
- crossing type: both diagonals cut, shortening s = 4 in.
- diagonal insertion in relation to bracing system line: middle; rotation angle = 0, Mirror
option switched off
 move to the Bolts / Welds tab and determine the following parameters of connectors:
- connector type: Welds
- type of welds for plates and profiles: 0.12-inch-thick fillet weld
 move to the Angles tab and switch off the Generate angles option
 move to the Battens tab and determine the following parameters of battens of double-leg
diagonals:
- definition method: Number of battens
- connector type: welds
- batten size: length l = 4, width w = 2 in.
- number of battens for each leg: 3
 press the OK button; the generated bracing with a part of the frame is presented in the
drawing below.
20.5.Stairs
20.5.1. Stairs - Geometry
A typical structure used to define steel stairs. To start definition of stairs, follow the steps
below:
 select the menu command: Steel /Parametric structures / Stairs
 press the icon.
Once the beginning point of stairs and the end point of stairs (definition of points P1 and P2
shown in the figure below) are indicated, the following dialog box appears on screen.

In the upper part of the dialog box there are two options that determine two possible positions
of the points P1 and P2:
1. notchboard (point P1 is the beginning, while point P2 is the end of a notchboard including
lengths of landings) - see the drawing below
2. system line (point P1 is positioned on the lower floor level, point P2 - on the upper floor level
and both points lie at the locations where the system line is broken) - see the drawing below.

The options in the above dialog box enable defining geometry of stairs.
The following two types of stairs are available in the upper part of the dialog box:
-1
-2 .
In the upper part of the dialog box the attributes of stair elements are chosen. Profiles
available on the selection list are the profiles defined in the Profile List dialog box. To add a
profile to the list of available profiles, press the button; it opens the Profile List dialog
box where a selected profile may be added to the list of available profiles.
Profile families available on the selection list are defined in the Family Manager dialog box.
To add a family to the list, press the button; it opens the Family Manager dialog box, in
Below is the edit field presenting a value of the slope angle of stairs; this value results from the
determined dimensions of stairs (positions of the stair-defining points - points P1 and P2).
The stair dimensions are defined in the edit fields located in the schematic drawing of a
selected type of stairs.
In the lower part of the dialog box there are two options: Lower landing and Upper landing.
Once they are switched on, the lower landing or the upper one, respectively, is generated in
the defined stairs. If one of the options Lower landing or Upper landing is activated, then the
options on the Landing tab become accessible.
Additionally, the Offset from the definition line edit field is accessible; it is used to specify an
offset of the stairs from the axis determined by the points P1 and P2.
After defining geometry of stairs and moving on to the Step distribution tab, the Stairs - Step
distribution dialog box is displayed on screen.
20.5.2. Stairs - Step Distribution

The options on this tab are used to determine parameters of distribution of the stair steps.
Once the Step distribution tab is selected, the following dialog box is displayed on screen.

In the upper part of the dialog box the options enable defining distribution of steps over the
length of stairs; the following parameters may be determined:
 floor level on the lower and upper landings
 number of steps in the stairs
 expected step height; this value is related to the number of steps.
The remaining parameters: demanded step height and distance between the two consecutive
steps are inaccessible; they are linked with the two parameters defined by the user, i.e.:
number of steps and expected step height.
After defining the distribution of steps and moving on to the Step definition tab, the Stairs -
Step definition dialog box appears on the screen.
20.5.3. Stairs - Step Definition

The options provided on this tab allow defining parameters of stair steps. After selecting the
Step definition tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the screen.

In the upper part of the dialog box parameters of a step may be defined (the parameters below
are available if the Insert steps option is switched on; if this option is switched off, steps will
not be generated):
Steps as user parts
the user may:
 select a step database and a family of stair elements; families available on the selection
list are defined in the Family Manager dialog box - to add a family to the list, the user
should press the button and in the Family Manager dialog box add the family to
the list
 choose a step profile
 determine dimensions of a selected step type.
Steps as bent plate

the user may:
 select a type of the bent plate:
or

 select a plate thickness and a connection plate thickness; families available on the
selection list are defined in the Family Manager dialog box - to add a family to the list,
the user should press the button and in the Family Manager dialog box add the
family to the list
 choose the connection type: bolted or welded
At the bottom of the dialog box there are lists for selection of bolt parameters (bolt diameter
and grade); pressing the Settings button opens the Bolt settings dialog box.
After defining parameters of the stair steps and moving on to the Landing tab the Stairs -
Landing dialog box appears on screen.
20.5.4. Stairs - Landing

The options on this tab are used to determine parameters of landings. After selecting the
Landing tab, the following dialog box appears on screen.
NOTE:
The options provided on this tab are inaccessible if the options: Upper landing and/or Lower
landing have been switched off on the Geometry tab.

The options in the upper part of the dialog box enable selection of the attributes for a plate
(material and family). Families available on the selection list are the plate families defined in
the Family Manager dialog box. To add a family to the list of available types, press the
button; it opens the Family Manager dialog box, in which a family may be added to the
list.
In the upper part of the dialog box a grate name, a grate unit weight and a type of the landing
family are determined, families available on the selection list are the families defined in the
Family Manager dialog box - to add a family to the list, press the button and in the
Family Manager dialog box add the family to the list; the options below are used to define
parameters of the upper and/or lower landing(s):
 landing type: grate or plate
 landing dimensions:
- landing thickness (and for the lower landing also the landing extension)
- landing width (and the landing extensions to the sides in both directions).
The upper landing or the lower one is generated (and the options are accessible on this tab), if
the Generate option is activated.
 Apply – after pressing this button, the stairs defined in the dialog box are generated on
screen without closing the Stairs dialog box; it allows checking whether the stairs have
been generated correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the stairs defined in the dialog box and
closing the Stairs dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of stairs is no longer visible
on the screen; to restore the dialog box display on the screen, press the Esc key on the
keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating the stairs.
20.6.Spiral Stairs
20.6.1. Spiral Stairs- General
A typical structure used to generate a spiral staircase. To start definition of stairs, follow the
steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Stairs spiral
 press the icon .
After indicating a point on the lower level of stairs and on the upper level of stairs the dialog
box presented below appears on the screen.

The options located in the above dialog box enable definition of geometry of the spiral
staircase.
In this dialog box basic dimensions of stairs and the type of stairs can be defined.
The length of stairs (the staircase height) is calculated based on the distance between the
defined points P1 and P2. There is a possibility to shift the points P1 and/or P2 in relation to
the defined upper and/or lower level of stairs. Moreover, the user may determine how far the
profile of a construction tube will extend above the upper level. The staircase axis in the
vertical plane coincides with the indicated point P1, however, it is possible to translate the
staircase horizontally in both directions.
In the right part of the dialog box the type of spiral stairs may be selected: coiling to the right or
coiling to the left.
In the lower part of the dialog box the attributes of the construction tube are chosen. Profiles
available on the selection list are the profiles defined in the Profile List dialog box. To add a
profile to the list of available profiles, press the button; it opens the Profile List dialog
box where a selected profile may be added to the list of available profiles.
Profile families available on the selection list are defined in the Family Manager dialog box.
To add a family to the list (delete a family or modify its properties), press the button; it
opens the Family Manager dialog box.
Below is the field for selection of a material of the construction tube.

20.6.2. Spiral Stairs - Steps

The options provided on this tab enable definition of parameters of stair steps and their
distribution. Once the Steps tab is selected, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
In the upper part of the dialog box parameters of the step can be determined:
 the user may choose a step type from the available step databases and assign a family
to it; families available on the selection list are defined in the Family Manager dialog
box; to add a family to the list (delete a family or modify its properties), press the
button - it opens the Family Manager dialog box
 for a selected step type - the user may provide information about its dimensions.
In the lower part of the dialog box it is possible to determine distribution of steps; the following
parameters may be defined:
 number of steps in stairs
 angle between the edge of the last step and the plane XZ of the coordinate system (i.e.
the current coordinate system while defining stairs)
 angle in the horizontal plane between the edges of the neighboring steps
 difference of height between the neighboring steps
 number of rotations of spiral stairs
 total rotation angle (globally)
 angle between the edge of the first (theoretical, not generated) step and the plane XZ of
the coordinate system (i.e. the current coordinate system while defining stairs).

20.6.3. Spiral Stairs - Base Plate

The options provided on this tab enable definition of parameters of a base plate. Once the
Base plate tab is selected, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
If the Generate base plate option is turned on, then the program will generate a plate in the
lower part of the spiral stairs. The following parameters are required for definition of the base
plate:
- thickness
- dimensions in both directions
- spacing of bolts in both directions
- diameter of openings
- thickness of welds joining with a construction tube
- material the base plate should be made of.
20.6.4. Spiral Stairs - Railing

The options provided on this tab enable defining parameters of a railing which may be
generated for spiral stairs. After selecting the Railing tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing
below appears on the screen.

In the upper part of the dialog box there is the Generate railing option; if it is switched on, then
options on the tab above are accessible and a railing will be generated while creating spiral
stairs. When the Generate railing option is switched off, a railing will not be generated while
creating spiral stairs.
The upper part of the dialog box holds options used to determine parameters of profiles for the
following railing elements: handrails, posts, and optionally, for the middle rail and the lower
rail. Lower and middle rails will be created if the options Middle rail and Lower rail are switched
on (the lists for selection of the profile type and the family type are accessible then).
Posts are always vertical profiles (their direction is compatible with the direction of the Z axis
of UCS). Posts are positioned in such a way so that the axis of the greater moment of inertia is
situated in the railing plane.
Profiles of handrails, posts and rails available on the selection lists are the profiles defined in
the Profile List dialog box. To add a profile to the list of available handrail, post and rail
profiles, press the button; it opens the Profile list dialog box where a selected profile
may be added to the list of available profiles.
Profile families available on the selection lists for Handrails, Posts and Rails are the families
defined in the Family Manager dialog box. To add a family to the list of available families,
press the button; it opens the Family Manager dialog box where a family may be
added to the list.
NOTE:
The list of handrail and rail profiles may include only some profile types (the list is filtered to
include several profile types); if there is no profile on the profile selection list, press the
button and in the Profile list dialog box, add an appropriate profile type to the profile list; the
profile list may contain the following profile types:

- handrail: round and rectangular tubes, angles, flat profiles, C-profiles, round profiles
- rails: round and rectangular tubes, angles, flat profiles, round profiles.
Geometry of spiral stairs determines the length of a railing; it is assumed that the railing is
generated along the entire length of stairs.
The following railing parameters have to be defined:
- basic dimensions (railing height, rail spacing)
- number of steps (not adjoined to by the post) between posts of the railing in the Post every
‘n-th’ step field
- number of steps to the first post of the railing.
If the Additional post on end of railing option is switched on, the railing will be generated in
such a way so that the additional railing post is situated on the last step of spiral stairs.
In the lower part of the dialog box is the field for selecting a material the railing is made of and
the edit field (Handrail/Post Weld Th) for defining a thickness of the weld joining the handrail
with posts.
There is also the More button available, which when pressed, opens the Details of railing
dialog box where additional parameters of fixing the railing can be given.
The above dialog box allows defining parameters as follows:

- weld type and thickness
- thickness of a plate and material it is made of
- diameter of bolt holes
- plate dimensions
- location of bolt holes.
At the bottom of the Details of railing dialog box there are lists for selection of bolt
parameters (bolt diameter and grade); pressing the Settings button opens the Bolt settings
dialog box.
The following buttons are located at the bottom of the Spiral staircase dialog box:
 Apply – after pressing this button, the stairs defined in the dialog box are generated on
the screen without closing the Spiral staircase dialog box; it allows checking whether
the spiral stairs have been generated correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the stairs defined in the dialog box and
closing the Spiral staircase dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of the spiral stairs is no
longer visible on screen; to restore the dialog box display on screen, press the Esc key
on the keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating the spiral stairs.

20.7.Staircase
20.7.1. Staircase - General
A typical structure used to define staircases. To start definition of staircases, follow the
steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Staircase
After indicating characteristic points of a staircase (definition of the points P1, P2 and P3 is
illustrated in the drawing below), the Staircase dialog box appears on the screen.
The options provided in the dialog box below enable defining geometry of a staircase.

The upper part of the dialog box holds the options as follows:
 Change height button - pressing this button changes the height of a staircase (the
changed value of the height should be entered into the edit field)
 Generate lines used for definition of railings - if this option is switched on, then the
program draws lines that are used to generate railings.
A number of levels is evaluated from the distance of the points being the basis for determining
the staircase geometry (the edit field is not accessible; this number may change after adding
or deleting levels on the Staircase landings and flights of stairs tab). In the dialog box there are
three available edit fields which allow defining translation of the insertion point P1 along three
directions (x, y, z).
The Direction option, in the lower part of the dialog box, enables determining on which side of
the longitudinal axis of a staircase the first flight of stairs should be located.
20.7.2. Staircase - Steps

The options provided on this tab are used to determine parameters of stair steps. Once the
Steps tab is chosen, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
Step parameters are defined in the upper part of the dialog box (the parameters below are
available if the Insert steps option is switched on; if this option is switched off, steps will not be
generated)
Steps as user parts
the user may:
 select a step database and a family of stair elements; families available on the selection
list are defined in the Family manager dialog box – to add a family to the list, press the
button and in the Family manager dialog box add the family to the list
 choose a step profile

Steps as bent plate

the user may:
 select a type of the bent plate:
or
 select a plate thickness and a connection plate thickness; families available on the
selection list are defined in the Family Manager dialog box - to add a family to the list,
the user should press the button and in the Family Manager dialog box add the
family to the list
 choose the connection type: bolted or welded
The lower part of the dialog box also holds the lists for selection of bolt parameters (a bolt
diameter and a bolt grade); pressing the Settings button opens the Bolt settings dialog box.
20.7.3. Staircase - Grates

The options provided on this tab allow defining parameters of grates. After selecting the
Grates tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the screen.

Options in the upper part of the dialog box are used to define parameters of plates or grates
which are horizontal elements of a staircase (landings).
If grates are chosen, the following parameters may be defined: a grate name, a unit weight
(kg/m2) and a family.
When plates are selected, the following parameters may be defined: a plate thickness, a
material and a family.
20.7.4. Staircase - Staircase Landings and Flights of

Stairs
The options provided on this tab are used for defining parameters of landings and flights of
stairs. Once the Staircase landings and flights of stairs tab is chosen, the following dialog box
appears on the screen.
The above tab presents tables with information about generated landings and flight of stairs.
The following operations can be performed on a set of staircase landings:

 adding of landings; the operation can be carried out in two ways:
1 press the Add > button and indicate - in a drawing - a point at which a landing should
be created
2 press the Add on level button and specify a number of the level on which a landing
should be added.
 deleting of landings; to do it, choose a landing on the list and press the Remove button.
Landing properties are available after selecting a landing on the list (the landing is highlighted
in the table) and pressing the Properties button. Parameters of a selected landing can be
modified in the Staircase landing properties dialog box.

In the right-hand side part of the dialog box is a list of flights of stairs which are added to the
list automatically after adding landings.
Properties of a flight of stairs are available after selecting it on the list (the flight of stairs is
highlighted in the table) and pressing the Properties button. Parameters of a selected flight of
stairs can be modified in the Flight of stairs properties dialog box.
templates (schemes) of staircases. After defining staircase geometry, it is possible to save
these settings by typing a name in the Use template field and pressing the Save as template
button. In future, after starting definition of a staircase and after selecting the name of a saved
template, all the parameters in the dialog box will be set exactly as they have been saved in
the template.
 Apply – after pressing this button, the staircase defined in the dialog box is generated on
screen without closing the Staircase dialog box; it allows checking whether the staircase
has been generated correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the staircase defined in the dialog box
and closing the Staircase dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of the staircase is no longer
keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating the staircase.
20.7.5. Staircase - Landing Properties

Once a landing is chosen on the list (the landing is highlighted in the table) and the Properties
button pressed, the Staircase landing properties dialog box, presented below, is displayed
on the screen.
The dialog box consists of two tabs: General and Grates/Plates.
The General tab

The options located on this tab allow definition of landing geometry.
The upper part of the dialog box holds the options: First beam and Second beam. If these
options are switched on, a landing will have additionally transverse beams. The first beam is

positioned further from the flight of stairs, whereas the other - closer. The edit fields are used
to determine characteristic distances of the beams.
In the lower part of the dialog box the Support of grates option is located; if it is switched on,
then additionally a flat bar supporting a grate is applied (the flat bar is welded to the stringer
under grates).
If one of the two options First beam or Second beam is switched on, then the edit fields for
definition of the thickness of welds joining bearers with stringers are available.
The options in the right-hand part of the dialog box enable assigning the following attributes to
beams and supports of grates: bar profiles, bar family types and a material.
The Grates/Plates tab

The options provided on this tab are used to define dimensions (grates/plates, distances from
the edge, etc.). Moreover, it is possible to determine the main direction of a grate (these
options are not accessible for plates); positioning of a grate is illustrated schematically in the
drawing below.
20.7.6. Staircase - Properties of a Flight of Stairs

Once a flight of stairs is chosen on the list (the flight of stairs is highlighted in the table) and
the Properties button pressed, the Flight of stairs properties dialog box, presented below, is

All necessary dimensions of a flight of stairs are defined in the upper part of the dialog box.
The Number of steps field enables changing a number of steps in a flight of stairs.
The following options are located at the bottom of the dialog box:
 First step – if this option is switched on, the first step in a flight of stairs is generated on
the lower level; if the option is switched off, then the step is not generated on the lower
level, while a landing plate or grate on the bottom landing is adequately elongated
 Last step - if this option is switched on, the last step in a flight of stairs is generated on
the upper level; if the option is switched off, then the step is not generated on the upper
level, while a landing plate or grate on the top landing is adequately elongated
 Three types of a flight of stairs: with both staircase landings and without bottom landing
(the options are available only for a landing on the 0 level) - if the option for the flight of
stairs without the landing is switched on, the landing will not be generated on the 0 level
(the length of a flight of stairs is reduced and it starts above the 0 level).
The options in the right-hand part of the dialog box enable assigning the following attributes to
stringers: bar profiles, bar family types and a material.
20.8.Railing
20.8.1. Railing - Geometry
A typical structure used to define geometry of steel railings. To start definition of a railing,
follow the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Railing
 press the icon.
After indicating an existing polyline, the dialog box presented in the drawing below appears on
screen.

All parts of a railing are comprised in one object. Connecting elements welded to other
elements of the structure on which the railing is fixed are also an integral part of the railing
object. Component elements of the railing are presented in the drawing below:
The basic definition while generating the railing is to indicate a polyline; the polyline may
consists of straight segments or arcs. Straight segments may be inclined at a certain angle,
however, they may not be vertical (parallel to Z axis of the UCS system); arcs defined in the
polyline must be parallel to the horizontal plane (XY in the UCS system).

Options in the upper part of the dialog box allow selection of a railing type:
type 1
type 2
type 3.
Polyline geometry determines length of the railing; it is assumed, that the railing is generated
over the entire length of the polyline; it means that the outer edge of the handrail should be
positioned at the beginning or at the end of the polyline. In addition, there is also a possibility
to define offsets (shifts along the polyline) at the beginnig or at the end of the railing (see the
drawing below). If an offset value differs from zero, then the railing, at its beginning or end, will
be extended or shortened with respect to the polyline length. A positive offset value results in
shortening the handrail, whereas the negative offset value causes extending the handrail.
Additionally, the drawing below presents the possibility of defining the railing offset in the
direction perpendicular to the direction of the defined polyline (the Depth offset parameter).
The remaining dimensions of the railing can be defined in the dialog box as shown in the
drawing below (presented as an example for the railing – type 1).

In the lower part of the tab is a calculator of spacing of main posts based on one of the values
given: a post spacing or a number of posts. Pressing the Modify button recalculates the
spacing of posts.
After defining geometry of a railing and moving on to the Profiles tab, the Railing - Profiles
dialog box appears on the screen.
20.8.2. Railing - Profiles

Options provided on this tab are used to select profiles for components of a railing. After
selecting the Profiles tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the screen.
Options in the upper part of the dialog box are used to determine parameters of profiles for the
following elements of the railing: handrails, posts and optionally, middle rail and lower rail.
Lower and middle rails will be generated if the options Middle rail and Lower rail are switched
on (then the lists for selection of profile type and family type become accessible).
Posts are always vertical profiles (their direction is compatible with the direction of Z axis of
the UCS system). The railing may be shifted perpendicular to the direction of a defined
polyline (see further on for description of the Depth offset option). Posts are set in such a way
so that the axis of the greater moment of inertia is positioned in the railing plane.
Profiles of handrails, posts and rails available on the selection lists are the profiles defined in
the Profile List dialog box. To add a profile to the list of available profiles of handrails, posts
and rails, press the button; it opens the Profile List dialog box where a selected profile
may be added to the list of available profiles.
Profile families available on the selection lists for Handrails, Posts and Rails are the families
defined in the Family Manager dialog box. To add a family to the list of available families,
press the button; it opens the Family Manager dialog box, in which a family may be
added to the list.

NOTE:
The profile lists for handrails and rails may include only some profile types (the list is filtered to
include only several profile types); if no profile is provided on the profile selection list, then
press the button and add an appropriate profile type to the profile list in the Profile
List dialog box; the following profile types may be included on the profile list:
- handrail: round and rectangular tubes, angles, flat profiles, C-profiles, round profiles
- rails: round and rectangular tubes, angles, flat profiles, round profiles.
After selecting profiles for individual elements of a railing and moving on to the Details tab, the
Railing - Details dialog box appears on screen.
20.8.3. Railing - Details

The options on this tab are used to determine constructional details of handrails and posts.
Once the Details tab is selected, the following dialog box appears on screen.
In the upper part of the dialog box the geometry type for the railing handrail is selected. The
handrail is a continuous profile over the whole polyline length. Posts are trimmed and welded
to the handrail using the workshop or site fillet welds of thickness specified by the user in the
dialog box (the Weld thickness option in the central part of the dialog box presented above).
If the handrail is made of an angle, then the handrail position with respect to the post looks as
presented in the drawing below. If the handrail is made of a flat profile, it is positioned
horizontally. For other profile types, the handrail is set in such a way so that the axis of the
greater moment of inertia is perpendicular to the railing plane. The handrail is treated exactly
as rails (middle and lower ones) defined in the railing.

The following handrail types are available:
 straight: a handrail is cut by a vertical plane at the beginning and at the

end of a railing
 vertical: at the beginning and at the end of a railing, a handrail ends with a
vertical segment made of the same profile as the entire handrail; the handrail and the
vertical segment are trimmed in such a way so that the cutting plane is a bisector of the
angle between the handrail and the vertical ending of the railing; the railing’s vertical
ending is welded to the railing by means of the workshop weld of thickness equal to the
thickness of walls in the railing profiles; for this type of handrail end the length of the
vertical handrail part L is defined
 elbow: at the beginning and at the end of a railing, a handrail ends with a
bent part; the bent part may be a segment made of the same profile as the entire
handrail (the Insert knees option switched off) or an additional knee made of the same
profile as the handrail and welded to the handrail using the workshop weld of thickness
equal to the thickness of walls in the railing profiles (the Insert knees option switched on);
for this type of handrail end the following parameters are defined: length of vertical
handrail part L and radius of handrail bend R
 ear: at the beginning and at the end of a railing, a handrail ends with two
bent parts; the bent parts may be the segments made of the same profile as the entire
handrail (the Insert knees option switched off) or the additional knees made of the same
profile as the handrail and welded to the handrail using the workshop welds of thickness
equal to the thickness of walls in the railing profiles (the Insert knees option switched on);
for this type of handrail end the following parameters are defined: length of vertical
handrail part L and radius of handrail bend R.
Moreover, the following methods of post ending (connection with the handrail) are available:
 – post profiles are trimmed in such a way so that the post ending fits the
handrail shape; the post is cut symmetrically on the sides (the cutting planes are

determined by specifying a value of the Alpha angle that must be less than 90 degrees);
additionally, the dimension B has to be given
 - post profiles are trimmed in such a way so that the top surface of a post is
trimmed with a horizontal plane below the handrail; the post is cut symmetrically on the
sides (the cutting planes are determined by specifying a value of the Alpha angle, that
must be less than 90 degrees); additionally, the dimensions B and C have to be given
 - post profiles are trimmed with a vertical plane; additionally, the dimension
D (a distance between the post and the handrail) has to be given
 - post profiles are elongated to the level of the horizontal axis of the
handrail, and next, are fitted to the handrail shape; additionally, the dimension E (a
distance between the post and the handrail) has to be given
 - post profiles are cut diagonally at the top, while one of the post sides is
extended to the handrail axis; additionally, the dimension F has to be given.
The following two parameters can be determined in the lower part of the dialog box:
- depth of cutting a post to fit the handrail of a railing
- orientation of the cross-section of intermediate posts; two positions are possible here:
= according to the orientation of main posts
= perpendicular to the orientation of main posts.
After defining constructional details of the handrail/posts and moving on to the Rails tab, the
Railing - Rails dialog box appears on the screen.
20.8.4. Railing - Rails

Options provided on this tab are used to determine constructional details of rails of a railing.
After selecting the Rails tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the
screen.

The options in the upper part of the dialog box enable defining parameters of a connection of
handrails and rails (intermediate and lower ones) when the Continuous option is selected in
the Intermediate rails field. There are three possibilities available:
 cut by bisector and welded: rails are cut in such a way so that the cutting
plane is a bisector of the angle between the joined rails; the rails are welded by means of
a workshop weld of thickness equal to the thickness of walls in the rails
 bent (this joining type is accessible only to two handrail types: straight
and vertical); rails are continuous over the entire polyline length; at points of rail joints the
segments are bent; for this type of a rail joint the bend radius R is defined
 elbow: rails are joined by means of additional elbows made of the same
profile as the rail and welded to rails using workshop welds of thickness equal to the
thickness of walls in the rails; for this type of a rail joint the bend radius R is defined

Below in the dialog box are options for definition of parameters of rails (intermediate and lower
ones) – parameters of intermediate and lower rails are alike. There are three possibilities
available:
 intermittent rails – rails are segments between the successive posts; the axis of a rail
profile is positioned in the railing plane; geometry of rail segments is fitted to posts; rails
are welded to posts by means of workshop fillet welds of thickness specified by the user
(the Weld Th edit field)
 continuous rails – if this option is selected, then the principles of joining the rails are
identical as those for joining the handrails; a rail profile is aligned (facing operation) to the
edge of posts and then welded to posts by means of workshop fillet welds of thickness
specified by the user (the Weld Th edit field); there are two possibilities of rail-to-post
alignment (facing operation): Front and Back (in front of or behind the railing plane); the
drawing below presents how to interpret the internal and external surfaces (front and
back) of posts for rails made of flat profiles
 rails passing through posts - if this option is selected, then the rail profiles are continuous
along the length of the polyline that defines geometry of the railing; posts are drilled in or
cut in such a way so that they fit the shape of rails; rails are welded to the external face
of posts by means of butt welds of the specified thickness; for this manner of positioning
the rails the options concerned with the facing operation are not accessible.
external internal
a rail passing through posts
For rails made of angles the alignment (facing operation) is performed differently (see the
drawing below) – the horizontal leg of the rail angle is cut to fit the post shape and the whole
angle is welded to the post.

In case of rails made of angles there is one possibility of setting the rail profiles – mirror. If
the Mirror option is activated, then the rails made of angles are positioned as presented
below. The Mirror option is inaccessible to profile types other than angles.
In the lower part of the dialog box there is the Flats field. The options located in this field make
it possible to set the rails made of flats - vertically or horizontally (see the drawing below); the
options are accessible only for the two types of rails: intermittent and passing through posts.
After defining constructional details of rails and moving on to the Intermediate posts tab, the
Railing - Intermediate posts dialog box appears on the screen.
20.8.5. Railing - Intermediate Posts

Options provided on this tab are used to determine constructional details of intermediate posts
of a railing. After selecting the Intermediate posts tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing
below appears on the screen.

The upper part presents a table with a description of intermediate posts created in a railing;
values in individual fields of the table can be edited using the options provided under the table.
After defining constructional details of intermediate posts and moving on to the Fixing tab, the
Railing - Fixing dialog box appears on screen.
20.8.6. Railing - Fixing

The options on this tab are used to determine the details of fixing the railing to the remaining
structure elements. Once the Fixing tab is selected the following dialog box is displayed on
screen.

Options in the dialog box above enable defining the method of fixing the railing to other
elements of a structure. Posts may be joined to supporting elements selected while starting
the Railing macro.
The following five methods of fixing are available in the dialog box above:
 Do not generate – after selecting this option connections with other structure elements
are not generated and the user is only able to determine a value of extension of posts
below the zero level (a negative value of this parameter is treated as the shortening of
posts)
 Welded – posts are cut to fit the supporting elements and welded to them using the site
fillet welds of thickness specified by the user
 To upper surface – posts are joined to supporting elements by a bolted connection (by an
endplate of dimensions determined in the dialog box); endplates are aligned (facing
operation) to the horizontal face of supporting elements; endplates are welded to posts
by means of workshop welds
 To side surface - posts are joined to supporting elements by a bolted connection (by a
circular or rectangular endplate of dimensions determined in the dialog box); endplates
are aligned (facing operation) to the vertical face of supporting elements; endplates are
welded to posts by means of workshop welds; there are two situations possible
depending on the distance between the post and the face of a supporting profile:
- if distance D is less than (plate thickness + 0.2 in.), the plate is welded to the side face
of a post (see the drawing below)

- if distance D is greater than (plate thickness + 0.2 in.), the post is supplemented with a
horizontal element made of profile identical to the post profile; this element is welded to
the post by means of workshop weld (see the drawing below).
 NF P 01-012 – posts are trimmed according to the rules of the code NF P 01-012; the
following four situations may occur:
- rib;
when using this fixing method posts are connected – by means of bolts – to the rib that is
welded to the supporting bar; this fixing type can be applied only when the shape (the
following profiles of the supporting bar are allowed: I-sections or C-sections) and the
position of the supporting bar make it possible to create the rib; the rib is always
connected with the web of the profile of the supporting bar
- angle (internal)
when using this fixing method posts are connected with the profile of the supporting bar
by means of an angle that is fixed – with bolts - to the web of the supporting bar; this
fixing type can be applied only when the shape (the following profiles of the supporting
bar are allowed: I-sections or C-sections) and the position of the supporting bar make it
possible to place the angle; the angle is always connected with the web of the profile of
the supporting bar

angles may be set ‘before’, ‘behind’ or on both sides of the post in relation to the initially-
defined polyline
- angle (external)
by means of an angle that is welded to the external edges of the supporting bar; this
fixing type can be applied with every type of profiles of the supporting bar; the angle can
be welded both to flanges and to any other surface of the supporting profile
angles may be set ‘before’, ‘behind’ or on both sides of the post in relation to the initially-
defined polyline
- plate
by means of a plate welded both to the post and to the supporting profile; this fixing type
can be applied with every type of profiles of the supporting bar; the plate can be welded
both to flanges and to any other surface of the supporting profile.
The lower part of the dialog box holds the lists for selection of bolt parameters (bolt diameter
and bolt grade) – they are accessible to the last two types of fixing; pressing the Settings
button opens the bolt settings dialog box.
After definition of the details of joining the railing to structure elements and moving on to the
Kick plates tab, the Railing – Kick plates dialog box appears on screen.

20.8.7. Railing - Kick Plates

The options on this tab enable definition of parameters of kick plates. Once the Kick plates tab
is selected the following dialog box is displayed on screen.
A kick plate is a vertical plate being the bottom limitation; a kick plate is welded to the railing
posts. If a kick plate should be generated in the railing, activate the Insert kick plate option
located at the top of the dialog box. If the Insert kick plate option is switched off, then a kick
plate will not be generated (the options on this tab are not accessible).
Kick plate profile and family type are selected from the selection lists in the upper part of the
dialog box. Profiles there are the profiles defined in the Profile List dialog box, whereas
families are the families defined in the Family Manager dialog box.
Kick plates are always flat profiles set parallel to the polyline defining the railing shape (see
the drawing below). The beginning / end of a kick plate is aligned (facing operation) to the
edge of the first / last post. There are three available positions of the kick plate with respect to
the railing posts:
- welded to the internal surface of posts
- in the axis of posts
- welded to the external surface of posts (this case is presented in the drawing below).

If the Axis (intermittent) option is activated, then a kick plate is made of separate segments
fixed between the railing posts (see the drawing below). The kick plate is set in the axis of
posts and welded to external surfaces of posts by means of butt welds. Take note that
individual segments of kick plates have to be fitted exactly to the spacing between the railing
posts.
Apart from that, the following parameters can be determined in the above dialog box:
 clearance – distance between the zero level and the lower edge of a kick plate (see the
drawing above)
 radius of bending – if a kick plate should be curved, then a value of the radius of bending
should be specified in this edit field
 weld thickness – thickness of a fillet weld joining the kick plate to the railing posts.
templates (schemes) of railings. After defining railing geometry, it is possible to save these
settings by typing a name in the Use template field and pressing the Save as template button.
In future, after starting definition of a railing and after selecting the name of a saved template,
all the parameters in the dialog box will be set exactly as they have been saved in the
template.
 Apply – after pressing this button, the railing defined in the dialog box is generated on
screen without closing the Railing dialog box; it allows checking whether the railing has

 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the railing defined in the dialog box and
closing the Railing dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of the railing is no longer
keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating the railing.
20.9.Ladders
20.9.1. Ladders - Position
A typical structure used to define geometry of steel ladders. To start definition of a ladder,
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Ladder
 press the icon.
After indicating the point defining the lower floor level P1 (this level may be corrected in the
dialog box so that it accounts for the grate thickness), the point defining the upper floor level
P2 (this level may be corrected in the dialog box so that it accounts for the grate thickness) as
well as the point positioned in the ladder plane (definition of points P1, P2 and P3 is presented
in a schematic drawing below), the following dialog box is displayed on screen.
All parts of a ladder are comprised in one object. Connecting elements welded to other
elements of a structure to which the ladder is fixed are also an integral part of the ladder
object.
A ladder consists of the following elements:
 Vertical bars
 Rungs
 Fixing elements (angles, plates, bolts)
 Cages (see the Cages macro).

The course of action while defining a ladder proceeds as follows:

 indicate two points (on the lower and upper levels) defining the ladder geometry – it is
done before the dialog box opens
 indicate structure elements to which the ladder will be fixed and levels on which fixings
will be generated
 determine other parameters in the dialog box
 accept the defined data (by pressing the Apply or OK button) which is followed by
generation of a ladder object in a drawing.
Options on the Position tab enable definition of the parameters listed below (see the drawing
below):
 A – distance between the indicated point P1 and the lower floor level (thickness of a
grate and finishing layers)
 B - distance between the indicated point P2 and the upper floor level (thickness of a
grate and finishing layers)
 C – shift of the ladder axis in the horizontal direction with respect to the position of the
indicated point P2
 D – distance between the ladder axis and the structure (the indicated point P2).
Apart from that, the difference between the floor levels is specified in this dialog box.
After completing definition of positions of the ladder elements and moving on to the Vertical
bars tab, the Ladders – Vertical bars dialog box appears on screen.
20.9.2. Ladders - Vertical Bars

The options on this tab are used to select a profile of which the vertical ladder elements will be
made, a family to which these elements will belong and a material. Once the Vertical bars tab
is selected, the following dialog box is displayed on screen.

The current program version offers three types of extended vertical elements of a ladder:
- type1: direct
- type2: extend
- type3: extend/direct.
The following parameters are defined for a selected type (see the drawing below):
 A – vertical length of the oblique segment – the parameter accessible only to type 3
 B – extended spacing of elements - the parameter accessible only to types 2 and 3
 C – spacing of elements
 H – height of elements’ extension above the upper floor level (depending on the height of
railing on the upper level)
 R – radius of elements’ bending (the option in not available when the extension is
obtained by welding) - the parameter accessible only to types 2 and 3.

Options in the top right corner of the dialog box allow selection of the method of forming the
extension of vertical elements (welding or bending).
The options in the lower part of the dialog box are used to assign the following attributes to
bars of the generated ladder: profiles of vertical bars, types of vertical bar families and
materials.
After completing definition of parameters of the ladder vertical bars and moving on to the
Rungs tab, the Ladders - Rungs dialog box appears on screen.
20.9.3. Ladders - Rungs

The options on this tab are used to define data concerned with ladder rungs: profile type,
family type and material. Once the Rungs tab is selected, the following dialog box is displayed
on screen.

The options provided on this tab are used to distribute rungs over the ladder length; it is
possible by means of the following parameters (see the drawing below):
 A – vertical spacing of rungs
 B – distance between the lower floor level and the lowerest rung
 C – vertical distance between the highest rung and the upper floor level.
Values A, B and C are strictly correlated with each other; by default the value C is assumed to
be 0 (the highest rung is placed at equal height with the upper floor level). If for given values of
A and C the B dimension is too small for the lowerest rung to be fixed, then the value of
parameter C is automatically adjusted.
This tab also gives the information about the difference between the upper and lower floor
levels.
The top right corner of the dialog box holds options that enable selection of the method of
fixing a rung to vertical bars (that which options are accessible in this field of the dialog box
depends on the profile of which the vertical elements are made); in the current program
version the following options are available:
For angles and flat profiles: Simple connection (the rung end fits the profile face) and
Connection into hole (see the drawings below)
Simple connection Connection into hole
For tubular elements: Fitted connection and Chamfered connection (see the drawings below)
Fitted connection Chamfered connection
The options in the lower part of the dialog box are used to assign the following attributes to the
rungs of a generated ladder: bar profiles, family types of bars and material.

NOTE:
The profile lists may include only some profile types (the list is filtered to include only several
profile types); if no profile is provided on the profile selection list, then press the button
and add an appropriate profile type to the profile list in the Profile List dialog box; the profile
list for rungs may include the following profile types: angles, flat profiles and tubular profiles.
After completing definition of parameters of the ladder vertical bars and moving on to the
Connections tab, the Ladders - Connections dialog box is displayed on screen.
20.9.4. Ladders - Connections

The Connections tab includes a table presenting points to which the ladder is fixed (if a new
ladder is generated, then this table is blank). Once the Connections tab is selected, the
following dialog box appears on screen.

Individual columns of the connection table show the following information:

- fixing number
- level with respect to the lower floor level
- type of fixing.
The following operations can be performed on a set of the ladder fixings:

 addition of connections; it can be done in two ways:
1 by indicating existing structure elements (horizontal beams) to which a ladder will be
fixed (after pressing the To selected element > button) – in this case, the program will
generate all the connection elements together with bolts
2 by defining the levels of fixings (by entering the level in relation to the lower floor level
into the Level field and pressing the On Level button) - in this case, the program will
generate the connection elements welded to the ladder and optionally, bolts
 removal of fixings; to do it, select a fixing on the list of fixings and press the Delete button
 adopting (inheriting) geometrical properties of a selected fixing.
The list of fixings is automatically sorted by levels.

After switching on the option: Ladder base on the lower level the ladder will be connected to
the lower floor level; it involves adding an additional fixing to the lower level to the list of
connections. If this option is switched off, then a connection of the ladder to the lower floor
level is not generated.
Under the table of fixings there are the lists for selection of bolt parameters (bolt diameter and
bolt grade); pressing the Settings button opens the Bolt settings dialog box.
The properties of a fixing are available after selecting the fixing on the list (the fixing is
highlighted in the table) and pressing the Properties button. Parameters of the selected
connection can be modified in the Connection properties dialog box.
templates (schemes) of ladders. After defining ladder geometry and parameters of ladder
component elements, it is possible to save these settings by typing a name in the Use
template field and pressing the Save as template button. In future, after starting definition of a
ladder and after selecting the name of a saved template, all the parameters in the dialog box
will be set exactly as they have been saved in the template.
 Apply – after pressing this button, the ladder defined in the dialog box is generated on
screen without closing the Ladders dialog box; it allows checking whether the ladder has
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the ladder defined in the dialog box and
closing the Ladders dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of a ladder is no longer
keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating a ladder.
20.9.5. Connection Properties

After selecting a fixing on the list (the fixing is highlighted in the table) and pressing the
Properties button, the Connection properties dialog box, presented in the drawing below,
opens on screen.

The dialog box above, called up for the selected connection, is used to define the connection
type (plates or angles) and to determine a number of connectors in the connection (1 bolt or 2
bolts). Below are the selection fields which enable defining the profile type and the material of
which the connection will be made. Profiles available on the selection list are the profiles
button; it opens the Profile List dialog box where a selected profile may be added to
the list of available profiles.
The contents of the dialog box differs depending on the connection type for which the dialog
box is called up and on the method how the connection has been defined (by selection of a
structure bar or a level). The following connection types are available in the program:
 splice connection by means of plates defined by indicating a structure profile; for this type
of a connection the program will automatically generate the connectors based on the
thickness of plates comprised in the connection; there is a possibility to generate a rib
(welded to a structure element) over the entire profile height or at the specified height
 splice connection by means of plates defined through the relative level; if a splice
connection type has been selected for the connection defined by indicating the level (on
which the connection is to be located), there is a possibility to generate connectors for
the plate welded to the ladder; length of the connectors is determined based on the sum
of thicknesses of plates comprised in the connection, therefore, in the additional selection
field the thickness of the plate not included in the ladder object should be selected
 fixing by means of angles; as regards generation of connectors, the same rules apply
here as for the splice connection
 fixing by means of the base plate (fixing to the lower floor level); the connector length is
determined based on the sum of thicknesses of plates comprised in the connection; in
the dialog box the user may also switch on generation of an additional plate used to fix
the ladder to grates (thickness of this plate is considered in definition of the connector
length).
20.9.6. Example of Ladder Definition
NOTE:
A ladder has been defined in the 3D frame presented in the drawing below.

To define a ladder, follow the instructions below:

 define a 3D frame presented in the drawing above
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Ladder or press the icon
 indicate three points defining the ladder location: P1, P2 and P3 – see the drawing above
 in the Ladders dialog box on the Position tab adopt the ladder dimensions as shown
below
 move on to the Vertical bars tab and select the options as follows:
Type of extended bars: Direct
Profiles: LP 3.5x3.5x0.25
Families: Profile
Materials: STEEL
Enter dimensions as presented in the drawing below:

 move on to the Rungs tab and select the options as follows:

Rung connections: Simple
Profiles: C 3x6
Families: Profile
Materials: STEEL
Enter dimensions as presented below:
 move on to the Connections tab and switch on the Ladder base on the lower level option
(the ladder will be connected to the lower floor level); an additional connection to the
lower level will be added to the list of connections; once it is indicated (highlighted), press
the Properties button and accept the default connection values in the Connection
properties dialog box by pressing the OK button
 at the bottom of the dialog box set the bolt parameters: bolt diameter = 0.625, grade =
4.8
 press the Save as template button (it opens an additional dialog box in which the
template name is specified, e.g. Ladder 1 and the settings will be saved to an external
file), after reopening the dialog box for ladder definition this name will be available on the
list in the Use template field
 press the OK button; the defined ladder will be generated at the selected location in the
3D frame – the part of the frame is presented below.

20.10. Cages
20.10.1. Cages - Shape
A typical structure used to define geometry of a 3D cages. This is a supplementing macro to
the Ladders macro. To start definition of a cage, follow the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Cage
 press the icon.
After indicating the first ladder bar and the second ladder bar (or after entering the cage
width), the dialog box presented in the drawing below appears on screen.

Cages are generated as one object; they can be split into separate parts (profiles, plates). The
basic definition while generating cages is to indicate the first (main) bar.
If a value entered into any edit field of this macro does not satisfy the structural assumptions,
then the background of this edit field turns red and an appropriate warning appears in the
command line.
Elements composing the cage are presented in the drawing below. Number of hoops and
vertical bars may be defined in the above dialog box; take note that there must be at least one
profile (main bar) in order to define a cage.
The ladder plane and the cage width are defined by indicating the second bar (profile) that
must be parallel to the main bar. The main bar also determines the vertical direction of a cage;
the cage height is defined as a difference (or if need be, as a sum) of the main bar length and
the values of offsets defined by the user. Upper and Lower offsets may be positive
(shortening) or negative (extension) values. The cage height determines, as well, the location
of first and last hoops which are always provided at the beginning and at the end of a cage.
Profiles of hoops and vertical bars available on the selection lists for Hoops and Vertical bars
are the profiles defined in the Profile List dialog box. To add a profile to the list of available
profiles of hoops and vertical bars, press the button; it opens the Profile List dialog box
where a selected profile may be added to the list of available profiles.
Profile families available on the selection lists for Hoops and Vertical bars are the families
defined in the Family Manager dialog box. To add a family to the list, press the
button; it opens the Family Manager dialog box, in which a family may be added to the list.
NOTE:
The profile lists for hoops and vertical bars may include only some profile types (the list is
filtered to include only several profile types); if no profile is provided on the profile selection list,
then press the button and add an appropriate profile type to the profile list in the
Profile List dialog box; the following profile types may be included on the profile list: flat
profiles and tubular profiles.
Once the profile type and the family type for hoops and vertical bars are defined, the type of a
cage shape and dimensions of a selected cage type should be determined. There are three
cage types available:

Type 1
Two parameters are defined here: hoop radius and distance to the ladder.
The hoop is a circle of user-defined radius (it is the radius of the internal edge of a hoop
profile). Apart from that, a value of distance to the ladder is specified (the distance is
measured to the axis of the main bar).
The cage dimension is calculated on the basis of the parameter values specified on the Shape
tab and the ladder width. It should be added here, that this value (presented in the dialog box)
is a distance between the external edge of a hoop profile and the axis of the ladder main bar.
Type 2
Three parameters are defined here: hoop radius, distance to the ladder and cage dimension.
The hoop shape is a combination of a rectangle and a semicircle of user-defined radius (it is
the radius of the internal edge of a hoop profile). Apart from that, a value of distance to the
ladder is specified (the distance is measured to the axis of the main bar).
The cage dimension is determined by the user. It should be added here, that this value is a
distance between the external edge of a hoop profile and the axis of the ladder main bar.
Type 3
Two parameters are defined here: hoop radius and cage dimension.
The hoop is a circle of user-defined radius (it is the radius of the internal edge of a hoop
profile). The cage dimension is determined by the user. It should be added here, that this
value is a distance between the external edge of a hoop profile and the axis of the ladder main
bar. The hoop part joining the ladder bar is a straight segment that is tangent to the internal
hoop edge.
At the bottom of the dialog box are the options allowing selection of a number of vertical bars
along the cage perimeter. There are three possibilities: 5, 7 or 9 vertical bars. Arrangements of
vertical bars along the perimeter for the available types of the cage shape are presented
below.

Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
After defining parameters of the cage shape and moving on to the Details tab, the Cages -
Details dialog box appears on screen.
20.10.2. Cages - Details

Options on the Details tab are used to determine parameters of connections in a cage. Once
the Details tab is chosen, the following dialog box is displayed on screen.

The upper part of the dialog box holds options that enable determining the position of vertical
bars with respect to the cage hoop:
- vertical bars outside the hoop
- vertical bars inside the hoop.
There is a possibility to determine the weld thickness for the hoop-vertical bar connection.
Options below are used to define parameters of the cage fixing to the ladder bars; there are
two connection types: welded or bolted. Three positions of the hoop with respect to the ladder
bar are allowed in the program:
 the hoop is aligned (facing operation) to the external edge of the ladder bar
 the hoop is aligned (facing operation) to the internal edge of the ladder bar
 axes of the hoop cross-section and the axis of cross-section of the ladder
bar are colinear (this type of fixing is available to a welded connection; it is inaccessible
when a bolted connection is selected).

Hoop–ladder bar connections are generated for every hoop. If a welded connection is
selected, the program generates site fillet welds of thickness defined by the user. If a bolted
connection is chosen, the following two situations may take place:
 bolts are put in round holes
 bolts are put in slotted holes; it is possible after activating the Slotted holes option; in
such a case, slotted holes are generated in hoops and their size equals the value of the
hole diameter increased by 0.32 in.
Under the parameters of fixing are the lists for selection of bolt parameters (bolt diameter and
bolt grade); pressing the Settings button opens the Bolt settings dialog box.
In the middle part of the dialog box the Radius of bending edit field is located; it enables
defining the radius of hoop bending at places where the hoop circular shape transforms into
straight segments.
Options in the lower part of the dialog box are used to determine parameters of the cage
widening in its lower part. In the current version of the program the widening is available
only to the second type of the cage.
The widening may start from the hoop indicated by the user (1 denotes the lowest hoop). In
the dialog box the lower hoop radius may be defined; dimensions of the intermediate hoops
are linearly interpolated.
After defining details of the cage geometry and moving on to the Exit tab, the Cages - Exit
dialog box appears on screen.
20.10.3. Cages - Exit

Options on the Exit tab are used to define parameters of the exit in the upper part of a cage.
Once the Exit tab is chosen, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on screen.
The top left corner holds the following types of the exit for the cage:
 none – the exit is not generated in the upper part of the cage; the cage ends with a
standard hoop

 straight - the exit is generated in the upper part of the cage as shown in the drawing
below
The following rules apply to generation of the exit (straight type):

1 above the highest hoop in the cage two elements are generated: an additional hoop (of
the same shape as hoops in the cage) and a handrail
2 the above-mentioned elements are supported by three vertical bars connected to the
ladder bars
3 additional vertical bars are generated at the same locations as vertical bars in the cage
(these additional bars are either continuous or intermittent)
4 details of connections of vertical bars and handrails are identical as those for connections
of vertical bars and cage hoops
5 the handrail is made of one C-section profile
6 the exit width equals the cage diameter
7 the distance between the last hoop in the cage and the additional hoop equals 1 in.
8 the exit dimensions are defined in the dialog box by entering values of two parameters:
railing height and handrail length
 left - the exit is generated in the upper part of the cage as shown in the drawing below
The following rules apply to generation of the exit (the left option):
1 the exit consists of two handrails: upper and lower ones (the profiles are continuous
profiles of the same type as the hoop type)
2 the last hoop in the cage must be positioned on the level that enables putting the exit over
it

3 handrails are connected to the ladder bars identically as the cage hoops; the hoop shape
in the vicinity of the ladder depends on the selected shape type of the cage hoop
4 additional vertical bars are either continuous or intermittent (see drawing)
5 details of connections of vertical bars and handrails are identical as those for connections
of vertical bars and cage hoops
6 the distance between the last hoop in the cage and the additional hoop equals 1 in.
7 the exit dimensions are defined in the dialog box by entering values of two parameters:
railing height and handrail length
 right - the exit in the upper part of the cage is generated as the exit – left (symmetrical
reflection of the exit - left).
templates (schemes) of cages. After defining the cage geometry and parameters of its
components, it is possible to save these settings by typing a name in the Use template field
and pressing the Save as template button. In future, after starting definition of the cage and
after selecting the name of a saved template, all the parameters in the dialog box will be set
exactly as they have been saved in the template.
 Apply – after pressing this button, the cage defined in the dialog box is generated on
screen without closing the Cages dialog box; it allows checking whether the cage has
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the cage defined in the dialog box and
closing the Cages dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of the cage is no longer
keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating a cage.
20.10.4. Example of Cage Definition
NOTE:
A cage has been defined for the ladder, definition of which is presented in the topic Example
of ladder definition.
To define a cage, follow the steps listed below:

 open the project including the defined ladder (see example of ladder definition)
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Cage or press the icon
 indicate two ladder bars determining the position of the cage – see the drawing below

 in the Cages dialog box, on the Shape tab select parameters of hoops and vertical bars
(choose profiles of these bars and families to which they will belong), e.g. profiles: RB
2.125, families: Profile (NOTE: if the profile RB 2.125 is not available on the profile list,
press the button and in the Profile List dialog box add the above-mentioned
profile from the AISC database to the list of available profiles)
 in the lower part of the dialog box adopt the following parameters:
Cage shape: Type 1
Number of vertical bars: 7
Accept dimensions as presented in the drawing below:
 move on to the Details tab; define there the following parameters:

Vertical bars located: outside; weld thickness = 0.12 in.
Fixing: welded; weld thickness = 0.12 in.
Hoop/ladder contact: external
 move on to the Exit tab; define there the following parameters:
Exit variant: Straight
Accept dimensions as presented in the drawing below:
 press the OK button; the program will generate the defined cage for the selected ladder.
The upper part of the generated cage is presented in the drawing below.

20.11. Column (Plate Girder)

20.11.1. Column (Plate Girder) - Geometry
A typical structure used to define a girder plate (column). To start definition of a girder plate,
 select the menu command: Steel / Plate girders / Column
 press the icon.
The dialog box presented in the drawing below appears on screen then.
The options in the above dialog box enable definition of the plate girder geometry. A column
may consist of 5 to 10 plates connected by means of workshop welds. Column elements are

presented in the drawing below (the drawing has been prepared for the Parallel flanges option
switched off).
NOTE:
It is not necessary to define all ribs in the upper part of the column; after activating the
options next to the fields in which dimensions of the oblique and horizontal ribs are defined on
the Parts tab, a selected strengthening element will be generated.
A web is made of one plate or two plates (depending on the Division of web option); oblique
and horizontal ribs are symmetrical with respect to the web (each of the ribs is composed of
two plates set symmetrically with respect to the web). The front flange may consist of one part
(one plate along the entire length of a column – the Contiuous front flange option switched on)
or two parts:
 a vertical flange in the upper part of the column and a flange inclined at a certain angle
(the Parallel flanges option witched off).
 a vertical flange in the upper part of the column and a vertical flange in the lower part of
the column (the Contiuous front flange option switched off).
Point no. 1 is the beginning point of a plate girder (this point will be defined first in a drawing),
positioned in the lower part of the column in the middle of the back flange; point 2 is the end
point of a plate girder (top point of the column), positioned in the upper part of the column in
the middle of the back flange and point 3 defines inclination of the upper part of the column
(for example, it may be the point which determines the roof ridge in a frame).
At the top of the dialog box is the Select new points > button. Pressing this button allows
defining a new position for a defined column (NOTE: the column is moved from the position
where it has been so far to the new one).
The following values may be defined in the dialog box above:

- column width in the lower part
- column width in the upper part
- lengths of strengthening elements (endplate, plate in the column head, oblique and
horizontal ribs)
- length of the upper part of the web (if the Division of web option is switched on)
- length of the column segment of constant cross-section.
The upper part of the dialog box holds the following options:
 Parallel flanges;

if the option is switched off, then the front flange is composed of plates, one of which may
be inclined; the Continuous front flange option is not available then
if the option is switched on, then the front flange is made of a plate parallel along the
entire length to the back flange; the Continuous front flange option is available then
 Continuous front flange; the option is available only when the Parallel flanges option is
switched on;
if it is switched on, then the front flange is made of one plate parallel along its entire
length to the back flange - see the drawing below; if the Continuous front flange option is
switched off, it means that the front flange is made of two plates connected with each
other by welds of lengths defined by the user.
NOTE:
Details of oblique and horizontal ribs (a rib shape, a chamfer dimension) may be defined on
the additional tab (Rib details).
 Division of web; if the option is switched on, a column is created with a web divided into
two parts (the upper and the lower plate) – the length of the upper part of the web should
be defined then; if the option is switched off, the web is composed of one plate along the
entire length of a column.
After completing definition of the plate girder dimensions and moving on to the Parts tab, the
Column - Parts dialog box appears on screen.
20.11.2. Column (Plate Girder) - Parts

After completing definition of the plate girder dimensions and moving on to the Parts tab, the

The drawing below presents values that may be determined in this dialog box:
 thickness and width of the back flange
 thickness and width of the front flange
 thicknesses and widths of strengthening elements in the upper part of the column
(endplate, plate in the column head, oblique and horizontal ribs).
In the upper part of the dialog box a part family may be chosen. Part families available on the
selection list are the families defined in the Family manager dialog box. To add a family to the
list of available types, press the button; it opens the Family manager dialog box where
the family may be added to the list.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to define all ribs in the upper part of the column; after activating the
options next to the fields in which dimensions of the oblique and horizontal ribs are defined, a
selected strengthening element will be generated.

After completing definition of dimensions of the plate girder/parts and moving on to the Welds
tab, the Column - Welds dialog box appears on screen.
20.11.3. Column (Plate Girders) - Welds

After completing definition of the plate girder dimensions and moving on to the Welds tab, the
following dialog box appears on screen.
Options in the above dialog box enable defining thicknesses of welds between plate girder
elements: web and front flange, web and back flange, web and plates/ribs (details A, B and C).
templates (schemes) of plate girders (columns). After defining plate girder geometry, it is
possible to save these settings by typing a name in the Use template field and pressing the
Save as template button. In future, after starting definition of a plate girder (column) and after
selecting the name of a saved template, all the parameters in the dialog box will be set exactly
as they have been saved in the template.
 Apply – after pressing this button, the plate girder defined in the dialog box is generated
on screen without closing the Column (plate girder) dialog box; it allows checking
whether the plate girder has been generated correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the plate girder defined in the dialog box
and closing the Column (plate girder) dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of the plate girder is no
on the keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating a plate girder.

20.12. Beam (Plate Girder)

20.12.1. Beam (Plate Girder) - Geometry/Parts
A typical structure used to define a plate girder (beam). To start definition of a plate girder,
 select the menu command: Steel / Plate girders / Beam
 press the icon.
The dialog box presented in the drawing below appears on screen then.
Options in the above-presented dialog box are used to define geometry of a plate girder. Point
no. 1 is the beginning point of the plate girder (this point will be defined first in a drawing),
whereas point 2 is the end point of the girder plate. Both points are positioned on the top face
of the upper flange in the middle of the flange width.
At the top of the dialog box is the Select new points > button. Pressing this button allows
defining a new position for a defined beam (NOTE: the beam is moved from the position
where it has been so far to the new one).
A generated steel beam may have the following cross-section:
- I-section
- T-section.
A plate girder (beam) consists of the following elements:

= 3 plates (web, upper flange, lower flange) and workshop welds in the case of an I-beam
= 2 plates (web, lower flange) in the case of a T-beam.
The drawing below shows values that can be determined in the above dialog box (it is
illustrated on the example of an I-beam – a part of these options is not available for a T-beam):
- thickness and width of the upper flange (these values are constant along the beam length)
- thickness and width of the lower flange (these values are constant along the beam length)
- web thickness (this value is constant along the beam length)

- web height at the beginning and at the end of the plate girder (the definition method
depends on the Perpendicular options).
In the upper part of the dialog box a part family may be chosen. Part families available on the
selection list are the families defined in the Family manager dialog box. To add a family to the
list of available types, press the button; it opens the Family manager dialog box where
the family may be added to the list.
The beginning and the end of a beam can be defined using two methods:
 after switching on the Perpendicular option (at the beam beginning or end) ( symbol
appears) the web plate and the plate of the beam lower flange at the beginning or at the
end of the beam are set in the plane perpendicular to the line determined by the points
P1 and P2 positioned on the beam upper flange – see the drawing below, which presents
the Perpendicular option switched on for the beginning of a plate girder, i.e. for point no.
1
 if the Perpendicular option (at the beam beginning or end) is switched off, then edges of
the web plate and plates of beam flanges at the beginning or at the end of the beam are
parallel to Z axis of the local coordinate system (UCS) – see the drawing below which
presents the Perpendicular option switched off for the end of a plate girder, i.e. for point
no. 2.
Beam - welds dialog box appears on screen.

20.12.2. Beam (Plate Girder) - Welds

Options in the above dialog box enable defining thicknesses of two-sided welds between:
I-beam:
- web and upper flange
- web and lower flange.
T-beam:
- web and upper flange.
templates (schemes) of plate girders (beams). After defining plate girder geometry, it is
Save as template button. In future, after starting definition of a plate girder (beam) and after
 Apply – after pressing this button, the plate girder defined in the dialog box is generated
on screen without closing the Beam (plate girder) dialog box; it allows checking whether
the plate girder has been generated correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the plate girder defined in the dialog box
and closing the Beam (plate girder) dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of the plate girder is no
on the keyboard
 Close – pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating a plate girder.

20.12.3. Example of Plate Girder (Beam) Definition
NOTE:
A plate girder (beam) has been defined in the 3D frame, generation of which is presented in
the example (see topic: Example of 3D frame definition).
In order to define a plate girder (beam), follow the instruction below:

 open the example including the defined 3D frame (see topic: Example of 3D frame
definition)
 select the menu command: Steel / Plate girders / Beam or press the icon
 in the Plate girder – beam dialog box on the Geometry /Parts tab select an I-beam
 in the Plate girder – beam dialog box, on the Geometry / Parts tab adopt the beam
dimensions as shown in the drawing below
 switch off the Perpendicular options at the beginning and at the end of the beam (for
points no. 1 and no. 2)
 move on to the Welds tab and determine the thickness of welds joining the web with
flanges; adopt weld thickness equal to 0.24 in.
 press the Save as template button (it opens an additional dialog box in which a template
name may be specified, e.g. Plate girder - beam 24/20.5 and the settings will be saved to
an external file) – after reopening the dialog box for definition of a plate girder (beam),
this name will be available on the list in the Use template field
 press the OK button
 indicate the position of point 1 – the beginning of the plate girder and point 2 – the end of
the plate girder (see the drawing below).
The plate girder generated in the 3D frame is presented in the drawing below.

20.13. Multi-segment Beam (Plate Girder)

20.13.1. Multisegment Beam - General
A typical structure used to define a multisegment plate girder (beam) in the 3D space. To start
definition of a plate girder, the user should:
 select the menu command: Steel /Plate girders / Multisegment beam
After defining:
- two characteristic points of a beam (the beginning and end of a beam) - P1 and P2
- a plane in which the web of a multisegment beam will be positioned
= points P1, P2 and an additional user-defined point determine the web plane
= in the local coordinate system, according to the Z axis
- number of segments of a multisegment beam (a number of segments must be included in
the interval 1 - 5),
the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the screen.
Characteristic points of a beam (P1 and P2) define location of a multisegment beam in the 3D
space (see the drawing below presenting a beam composed of three segments):
 point no. 1 is the beginning point of a multisegment plate girder (this point is defined first
in a drawing) - it determines the position of a point in the middle of the flange width on
the top face of the upper flange of the beam (the beginning of the first beam segment)
 point no. 2 is the end point of a multisegment plate girder (this point is defined second in
a drawing) - it determines the position of a point in the middle of the flange width on the
top face of the upper flange of the beam (the end of the last beam segment).
The beam web is always located on the plane parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS.

The total length of a multisegment beam is evaluated on the plane determined by the defined
points P1 and P2 and denotes length of the segment connecting these points.
Position of points depending on fitting of the upper flanges of plate girders

Upper flanges fitted to the upper plane Upper flanges fitted to the lower plane
For points P1 and P2 it is also possible to define offsets (vertical offsets); a positive offset
value results is moving the point up, while a negative one - down.
Offsets may be defined as follows:
 if the Vertical offset option is switched off:
offsets can be defined separately for the beginning point (P1) and the end point (P2) of a
beam; if a value of the vertical offset at the point P1 differs from the offset at the point P2,
then geometry of a multisegment beam changes; the total length of a a multisegment
beam and lengths of individual segments presented on the Segments tab are
recalculated and the tab will show current values of the total beam length and lengths of
individual segments (lengths of all segments will be identical)
 if the Vertical offset option is switched on:

the same offset at both beam ends is defined; it means that the beam is shifted up or
down (depending on the offset sign) by the same value at each point along the beam
length; the total length of a multisegment beam and lengths of individual segments
presented on the Segments tab do not change.
A multisegment beam consists of several segments. Each segment is made from three plates
(web, upper and lower flanges) joined by workshop welds.
Components of a segment are connected with each other by means of fillet welds of the
thickness defined in the edit field provided in the dialog box. Individual beam segments are
joined with each other by means of butt welds of the thickness defined in the edit field
provided in the dialog box.
Options in the upper part of the dialog box allows selecting:

- material of a multisegment beam
- family of elements of a multisegment beam.
Families of parts available on the selection list are the families defined in the Family Manager
dialog box. To add a family to the list of available types, press the button; it opens the
Family Manager dialog box where a family may be added to the list.
The middle part of the dialog box holds the following options:
 Generate continuous upper flange
if this option is switched on, then the upper flange will be defined as one plate along the
entire beam length

if this option is switched off, then the upper flange will be defined as separate plates for
each segment of a multisegment beam; these plates are connected by welds in places
of contact of successive segments of a multisegment beam
 Generate continuous web
if this option is switched on, then the web will be defined as one plate along the entire
beam length
if this option is switched off, then the web will be defined as separate plates for each
segment of a multisegment beam; these plates are connected by welds in places of
contact of successive segments of a multisegment beam
 Generate continuous lower flange
if this option is switched on, then the lower flange will be defined as one plate along the
entire beam length
if this option is switched off, then the lower flange will be defined as separate plates for
each segment of a multisegment beam; these plates are connected by welds in places
of contact of successive segments of a multisegment beam
NOTE: if the Generate continuous lower flange option is switched on and segments of
different lengths are defined on the next tabs of the dialog box, then the program will
generate a multisegment beam whose height equals the height of the beam at the
beginning of the first segment.
templates (schemes) of plate girders (multisegment beams). After defining geometry of a plate
girder, it is possible to save these settings by specifying a name in the Use template field and
pressing the Save as template button. In future, after starting definition of a plate girder
(multisegment beam) and after selecting the name of a saved template, all the parameters in
the dialog box will be set exactly as they have been saved in the template.
 Apply - after pressing this button, the plate girder defined in the dialog box is generated
on the screen without closing the Multisegment beam dialog box; it allows checking
whether the plate girder has been generated correctly
 OK - after pressing this button, the plate girder defined in the dialog box is generated on
the screen and the Multisegment beam dialog box is closed
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of plate girders is no longer
visible on the screen; to restore the dialog box display on the screen, press the Esc key
on the keyboard
 Close - pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating the plate girder.
After completing definition of basic parameters of a multi-segment plate girder and moving on
to the Segments tab, the Multisegment beam - Segments dialog box appears on the screen.
20.13.2. Multisegment Beam - Segments

After completing definition of basic parameters of a multi-segment plate girder and moving on
to the Segments tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the screen.

Options at the top of the dialog box allow selecting parameters of fitting for the upper and the
lower flanges, if flange thicknesses of successive beam segments differ.
Fitting of upper flange
to upper plane to lower plane
Fitting of lower flange

to upper plane to lower plane
In the central part of the dialog box there are two tables presenting information about (see the
drawing below for a beam composed of three segments):
- beam segments (number of segments, length of individual segments, total length)
- contacts of beam segments (number of segment contacts, which segments are joined with
each other).

The total beam length equals the distance between the user-defined points P1 and P2. By
default, the length of each segment is calculated according to the following formula:
L = distance (P1, P2) / n,
where:
distance (P1, P2) - distance between the user-defined points P1 and P2
n - number of defined segments of a multi-segment beam.
NOTE:
The length of beam segments may be changed in the table presenting information about
segments. It is possible to modify length values in the Length column. All the remaining values
are changed automatically and adjusted to the total length of a multi-segment beam.
Indicating a beam segment in the Segments table and pressing the Properties button results
in opening the Segment properties dialog box for definition of parameters of a selected
segment.
Indicating a contact of beam segments in the Contacts table and pressing the Properties
button results in opening the Contact parameters dialog box for definition of parameters of a
selected contact of segments.
20.13.3. Multisegment Beam - Segment Properties

The dialog box is used to define parameters of segments for a generated multi-segment
beam. It is opened after pressing the Properties button (in the Segments field) on the
Segments tab.
The Segment properties dialog box consists of the following tabs:

Geometry / Parts
Welds.
20.13.4. Multisegment Beam - Geometry/Parts

The dialog box is used to define parameters of a selected segment of a multi-segment beam.

The options provided in the above dialog box allow defining geometry of a chosen segment of
a plate girder. Point no. 1 is the beginning point of a plate girder segment, whereas point no. 2
is the end point of a plate girder segment.
At the top of the dialog box is the Segment length edit field; this is an inaccessible edit field (a
segment length may not be changed in this field, only in the Segments table) which specifies a
length of a selected segment of a multi-segment beam.
A segment of the plate girder (beam) type 2 consists of the following elements: 3 plates (web,
upper flange, lower flange) and workshop welds. The above dialog box allows defining
parameters as follows:
- thickness and width of the upper flange (these values are constant along the beam length)
- thickness and width of the lower flange (these values are constant along the beam length)
- web thickness (this value is constant along the beam length)
- web height at the beginning and end of the plate girder (the definition method depends on
the Perpendicular option).
The beginning and end of a beam may be defined in two ways:

 switching on the Perpendicular option (at the beginning or end of a beam segment)
results in ( symbol appears) setting the web plate and the plate of the lower flange of a
beam segment at the beginning or end of a segment - in the perpendicular plane to the
line defined by the points P1 and P2 positioned on the upper flange of a beam - see the
drawing below which presents the Perpendicular option switched on at the beginning of
the plate girder, i.e. at point no. 1
 after switching off the Perpendicular option (at the beginning or end of a beam segment)
edges of the web plate and plates of the beam flanges at the beginning or end of a beam
are parallel to the Z axis of the local coordinate system (UCS) - see the drawing below
which presents the Perpendicular option switched off at the end of the plate girder, i.e. at
point no. 2.

20.13.5. Multisegment Beam - Welds

The dialog box is used to define parameters of welds of a selected segment of a multi-
segment beam.
Options in the above dialog box allow defining thicknesses of double-sided welds between:
- web and upper flange of a beam segment
- web and lower flange of a beam segment.
20.13.6. Multisegment Beam - Parameters of Segment

Contacts
The dialog box is used to define parameters of connections between segments for a
generated multi-segment beam. It is opened after pressing the Properties button (in the
Contacts field) on the Segments tab.
The Contact parameters dialog box consists of the following tabs:

Lap splices and openings
Bevels
Welds.

20.13.7. Multisegment Beam - Lap Splices and Openings

The dialog box is used to define parameters of the connection of two selected segments of a
multi-segment beam.
Lap splices field

While defining parameters of the connection of segments of multi-segment beams, it is
possible to shift the contact of flanges of connected segments with respect to the contact of
the segment web. A shift value may be defined separately for the lower flange and the upper
flange in the relevant edit fields. The reference point for the definition of a shift is the plane of
contact of segments resulting from the assumed segment lengths. If a positive value is
entered into the edit field, then the contact will be shifted in the direction from point P1 to point
P2 (a negative value denotes the shift from P2 to P1).
NOTE:
Lap splices of segments can be defined only when plates of the flanges are characterized by
normal vectors parallel to each other; if a flange of one segment is inclined at a certain angle,
then a lap splice may not be defined (see the drawing below).
A lap splice may be defined A lap splice may not be defined
It is also possible to define distances between contacts of segment flanges; a value given in
the edit fields (separately for the upper and lower flange) is distributed symmetrically with
respect to the theoretical point of contact between flanges.
Openings field
When flanges of both adjacent segments should be welded with a continuous weld along the
entire width of flanges, it is necessary to generate additional openings in the beam web in the

area of contact between flanges. The user should specify a radius of an arc whose center is
the point of contact between flanges (the point shown in the drawing below).
20.13.8. Multisegment Beam - Bevels

The dialog box is used to define parameters of the connection of two selected segments of a
multi-segment beam (bevels generated for flanges of a plate girder).
When there are flanges of two adjacent segments of different thicknesses and/or different
widths, it is possible to define bevels of flange plates.
Switching on one of the Generate bevels options allows defining bevels of flanges of a multi-
segment beam.
NOTE:
Options provided on this tab are accessible only if flanges of adjacent segments differ in
thickness and/or width.
The right-hand part of the dialog box holds options for generation of bevels for the connection
of flange plates of different width (see the drawing below).

After switching on the Generate bevels option, the edit fields are available (separately for the
upper and lower flange) where a plate bevel can be defined (NOTE: bevels are defined
symmetrically on both sides of a plate of the flange with the greater width); bevels may be
defined by:
- specifying a value of inclination of the bevel line (e.g. 1:4)
- specifying a length of the segment over which a bevel should be generated.
The relationship between the bevel inclination and the segment length is expressed by the
formula:
L = X * D /2,
where:
L - length of the bevel segment
D - difference of widths of flanges of adjacent beam segments
X - bevel inclination (for inclination equal to 1:4, the value X = 4).
The right-hand part of the dialog box holds options for generation of bevels for the connection
of flange plates of different thickness.
After switching on the Generate bevels option, the edit fields are available (separately for the
upper and lower flange) where a plate bevel can be defined by specifying a value of the bevel
line inclination (e.g. 1:4). The length of a bevel segment is calculated form the same formula
which is given for bevels concerning flange widths. An example of a bevel for the connection
of lower flanges (including one inclined) is illustrated in the drawing below.
20.13.9. Multisegment Beam - Welds (Segment Contact)

The dialog box is used to define parameters of welds generated between connected segments
of a generated multi-segment beam.

The above dialog box allows selecting types of welds connecting chosen segments of a multi-
segment beam and determining thicknesses of these welds; welds join:
- upper flanges of successive beam segments
- webs of successive beam segments
- lower flanges of successive beam segments.
20.14. Compound Profile

20.14.1. Compound Profile - Cross-section
A macro used to define a model of compound-profile bars. Compound bars are created as a
set of objects available in the AutoCAD ® Structural Detailing - Steel program, such as:
profiles, plates, welds.
To start definition of a compound profile, follow the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Compound profiles
After indicating the start point and the end point of the compound profile, the dialog box
presented below appears on the screen.

The above dialog box consists of three tabs: Cross-section, Battens and Welds. The options
on the Cross-section tab are used to define parameters of the cross-section of a compound
bar, while those on the two remaining tabs enable determining parameters of connection
between chords of the compound profile: on the Battens tab - data concerned with battens
are defined (distribution along the length, size, etc.), whereas on the Welds tab – data related
to thickness of welds along the length of the compound bar.
In the upper part of the above-presented dialog box are the buttons as follows:
 Select new points – pressing this button makes it possible to redefine the start and the
end points of a new compound profile
 - connection of chords of the compound profile by means of welds along the
profile length; after pressing this icon the Welds tab becomes accessible (the Battens tab
is inaccessible); chords of the compound profile touch each other – the edit fields for
definition of spacing of chords in the compound profile are not accessible
 - connection of chords of the compound profile by means of battens; after

pressing this icon the Battens tab becomes accessible (the Welds tab is inaccessible).
The upper part of the dialog box holds the icons that represent schematically available types
of the cross-section of the defined compound bar; the following cross-section types are
available:
- two C-sections set back to back or face to face
- two I-sections
- C-section and I-section set back to back or face to face
- I-section and two angles
- four angles set face to face
- four angles set back to back
- two angles with shorter or longer legs set back to back
- two angles with shorter or longer legs set face to face
- two angles set in the form of a cross.
In the right part of the dialog box the following parameters of the compound profile are
determined:
 type of the profile of a single chord of the compound profile (e.g. C10x15.3, W 30x211); in
the case of a profile composed of a C-section and an I-section as well as an I-section and
two angles it is necessary to determine two profile types
 profile family
 profile material.
Profiles available on the selection list of profile types are the profiles defined in the Profile List
dialog box. To add a profile to the list of available profiles, press the button; it opens
the Profile List dialog box where a selected profile may be added to the list of available
profiles.

Family Manager dialog box, in which a family may be added to the list.
For a complete definition of the cross-section of the compound bar values of spacing between
profile chords are needed; depending on the selected profile type this may be one value and,
in some cases, two values of the chord spacing. Such an example is illustrated in the drawing
below for a compound profile, the chords of which are two angles (for the profile presented on
the left side one parameter a is defined, whereas for the other profile – two parameters: a and
c are specified).
The options DY and DZ located in the Insertion point field enable shifting the whole cross-
section in the directions of the axes of the coordinate system presented in the drawing of a
profile. By default, values of these parameters equal zero, which means that the axis of gravity
of the defined bar coincides with the line connecting the defined points (start and end points).
The Rotation option allows defining an angle of rotation of the cross-section about the
insertion point; pressing the +90 button makes possible quick changes of a value of the
rotation angle (every 90 degrees).
Once geometry of the compound profile is defined, it is necessary to determine the method of
connection of profile chords: either by means of battens, or using welds.
20.14.2. Compound Profile - Battens

After finishing definition of geometry of a compound profile and moving on to the Battens tab

Battens are used to connect component profiles (chords) of the compound profile. Battens
may take the form of rectangular plates or flats welded to both profile chords. Their location is
determined by the type of cross-section of the compound bar:
 between profile chords, if chords of the compound profile are set back to back
 between profile chords (alternately), if chords of the compound profile are set in the form
of a cross
 in the plane of flanges, if chords of the compound profile are set face to face.
Location of battens may be defined as follows:

 in one plane, if the option Plane XY or Plane XZ is activated
 in both planes, if the Both planes option is switched on
 in both planes alternately (it refers only to the following cross-section types: four angles
set back to back, two angles set in the form of a cross), if the options listed below are
activated:
Both planes
Both planes and Pairs of battens in two planes
NOTE:
For a compound profile with battens located in two planes XY and XZ there is a possibility to
define battens separately for each of the planes (the Both planes option is switched off), or
simultaneously for both planes (the Both planes option is switched on). If parameters of
battens in the planes XY and XZ differ, then with the Both planes option switched on, the fields
where these parameters are defined are blank. Typing a parameter value into the blank field,
the user imposes the same value of the parameter in both planes XY and XZ.

Distribution of battens along the length of the compound profile involves the following steps:
 selection of a method: regular (battens are spaced at equal distance) or irregular (battens
are freely spaced along the length)
 determining values of extreme dimensions (the distance between the profile beginning
and the first batten and the distance between the profile end and the last batten)
 definition of batten spacing along the length of the compound profile.
In the lower part of the dialog box a batten type is chosen. There are two batten types allowed:
- a plate
- a flat from the profile database.
The following parameters have to be defined for the batten (see the drawing below):
- plate dimensions A and B (or dimension B of the flat)
- thickness th of the plate or profile of the flat
- thickness a of a fillet weld that joins the batten with chords of the compound bar
- dimensions C and D that determine location of the batten on the bar
- material that the plate or the flat is made from.
profiles.
20.14.3. Compound Profile - Welds

After finishing definition of geometry of a compound profile and moving on to the Welds tab the
dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the screen.

The options in the above dialog box enable defining thickness of welds (a fillet weld or a butt
weld depending on the type of profiles in the compound profile) along the profile length.
At the bottom of the dialog box is the Use template selection field which contains user-defined
templates (schemes) of compound profiles. After defining geometry of a compound profile, it is
Save as template button. In future, after starting definition of the compound profile and after
as they have been saved in the template (except the spacing of battens, since this value may
differ because of a different distance between the beginning and the end of a compound bar).
 Apply – after pressing this button, the compound profile defined in the dialog box is
generated on the screen without closing the Compound profiles dialog box; it allows
checking whether the profile has been generated correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the compound profile defined in the
dialog box and closing the Compound profiles dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of compound profiles is no
longer visible on the screen; to restore the dialog box display on the screen, press the
Esc key on the keyboard
 Close - pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating a compound profile.
20.15. Special Profile - Castellated Beam

20.15.1. Castellated Beam - Definition
The macro used to define a castellated section beam. To define a castellated beam, the user
should:
 select the menu command: Steel / Castellated beam
After indicating the beginning and end points of a castellated beam, the dialog box shown in
the drawing below appears on the screen.

A castellated beam is made by welding together longitudinally-cut webs of rolled I-sections

(types: 10-15, 20-25, 30).
It is possible to define three types of a castellated beam:

- profile with hexagon-shaped openings
- profile with hexagon-shaped openings (with a spacer plate)
- profile with round openings.
The listed types – profiles of a castellated beam with basic designations of dimensions are
presented in the drawings below:
- hexagonal openings:
c - cut depth
w - distance between openings
Chamfer angle: 60
- hexagonal openings with a spacer plate:

c - cut depth
hs - height of a spacer plate
Chamfer angle: 60
- round openings:
d - opening diameter
H - section height.
The following parameters of a castellated profile are defined in the upper part of the dialog
box:
 profile type (I-section)
 profile material
 profile family.
dialog box. To add a profile to the list of available profiles, the user should press the
button; it opens the Profile list dialog box where a selected profile may be added to the list of
available profiles.
The middle part of the dialog box holds the following options:
 Insertion line - the line of insertion of a castellated beam profile may be situated as
follows:
- middle: the insertion line coincides with the axis passing through the center of gravity
- lower: the insertion line is situated in the middle of the outer surface of the lower flange
- upper: the insertion line is situated in the middle of the outer surface of the upper flange
 Rotation - defines an angle of rotation of a profile with respect to the insertion line; the
following rotation angles are available: 90; 180 and 270; this field also allows entering an
arbitrary value of the rotation angle
 Weld type - selects a type of welds joining parts of a castellated beam and determines
thickness of welds.
templates (schemes) of castellated beams. After defining geometry of a castellated beam, it is
possible to save these settings by specifying a name in the Use template field and pressing

the Save as template button. In future, after starting definition of the castellated beam and
 Apply - after pressing this button, a castellated beam defined in the dialog box is
generated on the screen without closing the Special profiles - castellated beam dialog
box; it allows checking whether the beam has been generated correctly
 Apply - after pressing this button, a castellated beam defined in the dialog box is
generated on the screen and the Special profiles - castellated beam dialog box is
closed
 Hide - after pressing this button, the dialog box for definition of castellated beams is no
longer visible on the screen; to restore the dialog box display on the screen, press the Esc
key on the keyboard
 Close - pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating a castellated beam.
20.16. Brace
20.16.1. Brace - General
A macro used for definition of a brace between a girder and a purlin positioned on it. The
brace is an oblique element used to protect the lower chord of the girder against buckling (and
consequently, to protect an entire spandrel beam against lateral buckling).
To start definition of the brace, follow the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Brace
After indicating the girder and the purlin supported by it, the dialog box shown below appears
on the screen.
NOTE:
While the girder and the purlin are being selected, the program verifies if selected profiles fulfill
the requirements of the brace construction. It should be added here that:
girder – may be any I-section or plate girder
purlin - may be any I-section or C-section.

The above dialog box consists of three tabs: General, Connection to girder and Connection to
purlin. On the General tab parameters of a supporting element (this is an angle selected from
the database) are defined. The two remaining tabs enable defining parameters of connection
of the brace with the girder and the purlin.
In the upper part of the above-presented dialog box is an option concerned with the brace
insertion line. The following selection is possible: the system axis will be either the axis of
gravity of the brace profile or the axis connecting axes of openings for fasteners; therefore,
two possibilities to define the insertion line are available:
 profile axis – if this option is selected, the brace profile will be inserted in the axis of gravity
 bolt axis – enables inserting the profile along the line connecting axes of fastener
openings.
The central part of the dialog box includes options for definition of the brace parameters:
 profile that the brace will be made of
 family to which the brace will belong
 material that the brace will be made from
 brace dimensions (horizontal and vertical dimensions of a triangle that makes up the
brace, brace length, distance between the brace profile and the lower vertex of the
triangle, etc.)
 additionally, there are available options (front, back), that make it possible to choose the
side on which the brace profile is to be placed in relation to the brace plane.
profiles.
The option in the lower part of the dialog box enables setting bolt parameters (a bolt diameter
and grade) – except the bolts of the connection with a purlin; pressing the Settings button
opens the Bolt settings dialog box.
Once the brace geometry is defined, the method of connection of the brace with the girder and
the purlin should be determined.
20.16.2. Brace - Connection to Girder

After completing definition of the brace geometry and moving on to the Connection to girder
tab, the dialog box presented in the drawing below is displayed on the screen.

The upper part of the dialog box holds the option Fit rib height to the girder profile; if it is
switched on, a rib will be fitted to the space between the flanges of a girder profile.
A connection of the brace with the girder takes the form of a rib welded to the girder (along the
whole girder height or only along its part) and the brace is fixed to this rib. Definition of this
connection requires that the following parameters are specified:
= rib thickness
= material that the rib is made from
= rib dimensions (height and width of the rib)
= dimension of the rib chamfer
= parameters of bolts and bolt openings:
- distance of the first fastener from the end of the brace element (dimension A in the drawing
below)
- distances between fasteners (dimensions B in the drawing below)
- distance between the fastener line and the edge of the brace profile (dimension C in the
drawing below)
= values of weld thickness.

20.16.3. Brace - Connection to Purlin

After completing definition of the brace geometry and moving on to the Connection to purlin
tab the dialog box presented in the drawing below is displayed on the screen.
The options in the upper part of the dialog box enable selecting the type of connection
between a brace and a purlin; the following possibilities of connection are available:
 by means of a gusset plate (the plate is welded axially to the purlin)
 using an angle connected to the purlin by means of bolts
 using two plates welded to each other (forming a T-shaped section) and connected to the
purlin by means of bolts.
profiles.
I Connection by means of a gusset plate

The following parameters have to be specified to define this connection:
= plate thickness
= material that the plate is made from
= plate dimensions (plate height and width)

- distance of the first fastener from the end of the brace element
- distances between fasteners
- distance between the fastener line and the edge of the brace profile
- bolt diameter and grade; pressing the Settings button opens the Bolt settings dialog
box
= values of weld thickness.
II Connection by means of an angle

= angle length
= position of the angle in the cross-section in relation to the purlin axis
box
= location of fasteners connecting the angle with the purlin in the cross-section
= spacing of fasteners in the angle in the longitudinal direction.
III Connection by means of two plates welded to each other

= length of connecting plates
= height of the vertical plate inclusive of the horizontal plate
box
= spacing of fasteners in the cross-section
= longitudinal spacing.
templates (schemes) of braces. After defining the brace geometry and connections with the
girder / purlin, it is possible to save these settings by typing a name in the Use template field
and pressing the Save as template button. In future, after starting definition of the brace and
 Apply – after pressing this button, the brace defined in the dialog box is generated on
the screen without closing the Brace dialog box; it allows checking whether the brace
and its connection with the girder / purlin have been generated correctly
 OK – pressing this button causes generation of the brace defined in the dialog box and
closing the Brace dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of braces is no longer visible
on the screen; to restore the dialog box display on the screen, press the Esc key on the
keyboard
 Close - pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating the brace.
20.17. Grate Spreading

20.17.1. Spreading of Grates - General
The macro used to generate the distribution (spreading) of steel grates in a selected region.
To start defining the spreading of steel grates, the user should:
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Grate spreading
 press the icon.

After indicating:
1. a region where steel grates will be spread (after drawing a contour of the region or
indicating existing contours)
2. the beginning point of the spreading
3. a direction of the spreading
A defined spreading region is determined by giving coordinates of points of the region or

indicating existing elements of a contour (arcs, lines, polylines). First three points define a
plane of the steel grate spreading (NOTE: a region contour may consist of any number of
points).
After defining geometry of the region, it is necessary to determine the origin point of the steel
grate spreading in the defined region. Its location determines the position of the first steel
grate; successive grates will be arranged beginning with the point of location of the first grate.
Moreover, a direction of spreading has to be defined – it is enough to indicate a second point
which together with the origin point of the spreading determines the direction of the steel grate
spreading (see the drawing below). The spreading direction is, by default, consistent with the
load carrying direction of a steel grate.

The following options are available on the General tab:

 Standard grate dimensions field is used to specify dimensions (length and width) of a
standard grate that will be spread
 Spreading area field provides the information as follows (it is not editable):
total area - area of the spreading region
area filled by standard grates - area of the region filled with standard grates (of
dimensions defined in the upper part of the tab)
area filled by non-standard grates - area of the region that results from the difference
between the total area and the area filled with standard grates
The two values (area filled by standard grates and area filled by non-standard grates)
inform about the optimal spreading of standard grates; they are recalculated if the user
modifies values of standard grate dimensions and values of offsets defined on the last
tab in the dialog box
 Openings field holds two buttons that allow:
Add - adding a round or rectangular opening; they are defined by specifying coordinates
of opening points or indicating existing elements of an opening contour (circles, arcs,
lines)
Remove - removing a round or rectangular opening by indicating an opening contour.
20.17.2. Spreading of Grates - Grate

After moving on to the Grate tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the
screen.
Options in the upper part of the dialog box are used to provide information concerning basic
parameters of grates:
 grate name
 material the grate is made of

 family the grate belongs to

 unit weight of a grate
 grate thickness.
Families available on the selection list are the families defined in the Family Manager dialog
box. To add a family to the list of available types, press the button; it opens the Family
Manager dialog box where a family may be added to the list.
Below is the Load carrying direction field where the main direction of steel grates can be
defined. The following two possibilities are available:
- the load carrying direction is parallel to the spreading direction defined by the user
- the load carrying direction is perpendicular to the spreading direction defined by the user
The lower part of the dialog box holds the Minimum length of grate side field; this is an
additional parameter for defining the minimum length of a side of a non-standard steel grate
used in the grate spreading. It has effect on generation of the grate spreading, since for
regions filled with non-standard grates whose one of the sides is less than the length defined,
a grate is not generated. For example, if:
 the minimum side length equals 45 mm, it means that grates whose length of one side is
equal or greater than 45 mm will be generated in a model
 the minimum side length equals 0 mm, it means that there are no limitations while
generating grates and each, even the smallest grate (i.e. the one whose side length
equals 1 mm) can be generated.
20.17.3. Spreading of Grates - Offsets

After moving on to the Offsets tab, the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the
screen.

The above dialog box allows defining values of offsets for some of the parameters used while
spreading steel grates:
 Offset of boundary used to increase / decrease a spreading area; each component of a
region contour is shifted by a value specified in the edit field: a positive value indicates
shifting the contour towards the inside of the region (reduction of the region), while a
negative value – shifting the contour towards the outside of the region (increase of the
region); an offset value is defined with respect to the initial contour of the region
 Offset of origin point enables shifting the origin point of the spreading (an offset value is
defined with respect to the initial contour of the region); the point can be shifted in two
directions:
in the X direction - along the vector perpendicular to the direction vector of the grate
spreading
in the Y direction - along the direction vector of the grate spreading;
a positive value indicates an offset compatible with the vector sense

 Offset of level allows shifting the plane of spreading; a positive value indicates an offset
upwards, whereas a negative value - downwards.
 Apply - after pressing this button, the grate spreading defined in the dialog box is
generated on the screen without closing the Spreading of grates dialog box; it allows
checking whether the spreading has been generated correctly in the defined region
 OK - pressing this button generates the spreading of grates defined in the dialog box and
closing the Spreading of grates dialog box
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for definition of the grate spreading is no
longer visible on the screen; to restore the dialog box display on the screen, press the
Esc key on the keyboard
 Close - pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating the grate
spreading.
20.18. Purlin Spreading

20.18.1. Distribution of Purlins
The macro used to generate a distribution (spreading) of purlins in a selected area of the roof
plane. Distributed elements include purlins and brace rods.
To start defining the purlin distribution, the user should:
 select the menu command: Steel / Parametric structures / Purlin spreading
After indicating:
1. the beginning point of first purlin (P1)
2. the end point of first purlin (P2)
3. any point positioned on the last purlin (P3),
the dialog box shown in the drawing below appears on the screen then.

Three indicated points (P1, P2 and P3) have to define a plane unambiguously (they may not
be collinear). Positions of these points determine the coordinate system (see the drawing
below):
- point P1 is the origin of the coordinate system
- points P1 and P2 determine a direction of the X axis of the coordinate system
- point P3 determines a direction of the Y axis of the coordinate system.
The Z axis of the purlin profile is always perpendicular to the roof plane.
After generating the distribution it is assumed that all purlins are parallel to each other and of
the same length.
The upper part of the Purlins tab holds the options for determining the location of distributed
purlins with respect to defined points P1, P2 and P3 (purlin length, distances of the first and
last purlins from the defined lines of purlin distribution).
The following purlin parameters can be defined in the lower part of the dialog box:
 purlin profile
 material a purlin is made of
 family a purlin belongs to.

add a profile to the list of available profiles, the user should press the button; it opens
the Profile list dialog box where a selected profile may be added to the list of available profiles.
Families available on the selection list are the families defined in the Family Manager dialog
box. To add a family to the list of available types, press the button; it opens the Family
Manager dialog box where a family may be added to the list.
Moreover, parameters of the location of purlins in the roof plane may be determined here:
 the Rotated option – switching the option on/off changes the setting of a purlin profile
 the edit field is used to specify a value of the shift (distance between the bottom plane of
the lower flange of a purlin and the roof plane).
20.18.2. Distribution of Purlins - Brace Rod

Options provided on this tab allow defining additional bars (brace rods) between axes of roof
girders.
Brace rods may have one of two shapes listed below (the type may be chosen in the Brace
rods column in the table):
- single

- double.
If n purlins are generated, then the oblique bar of a brace rod is positioned between purlins: n-
1 and n. At the place where the oblique bar of a brace rod is connected with a purlin, the
profile of the brace rod is perpendicular to the purlin web (it means that the oblique bar is
bent).
All the remaining purlins (from 1 to n-2) are connected with each other by means of a straight
bar.
Properties of a brace rod and details of the connection are available in a separate dialog box;
properties of brace rods are available after selecting one of them on the list (the brace rod is
highlighted in the table) and pressing the Properties button. Parameters of a selected brace
rod can be changed in the Properties of brace rods dialog box.
 Add > - after pressing this button the user should indicate a point determining the
location of a brace rod in a structure model; once it is indicated, another line is added to
the brace rod table
 Add - after entering a coordinate of the brace rod location into the edit field to the right of
the button and pressing this button, the program verifies if the value entered is correct; if
it is correct, another line appears in the brace rod table
 Remove - after selecting a brace rod on the list (the table line is highlighted) and
pressing this button the line highlighted in the table is removed.
20.18.3. Distribution of Purlins - Brace Rod Properties

After selecting a brace rod on the list (the brace rod is highlighted in the table) on the Brace
rods tab and pressing the Properties button, the Properties of brace rods dialog box, shown
in the drawing below, opens on the screen.

The above dialog box is used to determine parameters of the connection of a brace rod with
purlins:
- dimensions
- parameters of profiles of brace rods
- types of nuts and washers used in the connection.
20.18.4. Distribution of Purlins - Dividing

Options provided on this tab are used to divide a purlin along its length. On the tab presented
in the drawing below the user should specify points at which purlins will be divided along their
length (in the Dividing points field); locations of the points are determined by specifying the X
coordinate with respect to the coordinate system defined by points P1, P2 and P3. The
Splitting distance field is used to give a value of the distance between successive parts of a
purlin.
If purlins are made of Z-profiles, they may be connected by a lap joint; the Lap connection
option is available then.
If the Generate bolts option is switched on, this will be a bolted lap connection; parameters of
a bolted connection (a number of rows and columns of bolts, a bolt grade, etc.) may be
defined in the lower part of the dialog box.
templates (schemes) of purlin distributions. After defining a distribution of purlins, it is possible
to save these settings by specifying a name in the Use template field and pressing the Save
as template button. In future, after starting definition of the purlin distribution and after

 Apply - after pressing this button, the purlin distribution defined in the dialog box is
generated on the screen without closing the Purlin distribution dialog box; it allows
checking whether the purlin distribution has been generated correctly
 OK - after pressing this button, the purlin distribution defined in the dialog box is generated
on the screen and the Purlin distribution dialog box closes;
 Hide - after pressing this button the dialog box for defining the purlin distribution is no
longer visible on the screen; to restore the dialog box display on the screen, press the Esc
key on the keyboard
 Close - pressing this button closes the dialog box without generating the purlin
distribution.
20.19. Development Pipe

20.19.1. Development Pipe
A macro used to generate a drawing of a developed tubular profile. To start an operation of
tubular profile development, follow the steps below:
 select the menu command: Steel / Tube development
 press the icon.
Once a tubular section profile is indicated on screen, the following dialog box appears.
The following drawing parameters may be determined in the upper part of the dialog box:
 name of the printout template that will be additionally generated
 drawing scale that will be applied in generation of a development drawing
 template that will be used to generate printout (*.dwt format file); pressing the (...) button
opens a dialog box for selection of any template file saved on disk
 starting contour angle – an angle which determines lines cutting through a pipe to be
developed (the angle is measured from Y axis in the local coordinate system of a bar)
 shortening; if this option is activated, long tubular profiles (these segments of elements
that do not include any characteristic points) will be shortened in a drawing; the shortening
of an element is represented by a break in the shortened element; if the shortening option
is switched off, then a whole tubular profile will presented on screen
 description style applied in description of the generated printout
 placement of a description in the drawing (in the printout template).
In the lower part of the dialog box are the options used for selection of parameters of tubular
profile contours. If the Draw contour option (for the external and / or internal contours) is

activated, then the external and / or internal contours will be presented in a selected color in a
drawing. Pressing the (...) button opens the dialog box enabling selection of a color for the
external and / or internal contours.
After pressing the OK button the program generates a ready-to-print layout including a
drawing, named as specified in the above dialog box. A printout is attached to the printout list
of the AutoCAD ® Structural Detailing - Steel program and saved in the project. The layout
also includes a text description providing basic parameters of the indicated tubular profile. A
part of the printout layout created for an example of a tubular profile is illustrated below.

Asd Steel Manual Eng 2009 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Asd Steel Manual Eng 2009 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AutoCAD Structural Detailing - Steel - User’s Manual page: 1

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

14.6. GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................... 105

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

20.1. AUTOCAD STRUCTURAL DETAILING - STEEL - DESCRIPTION OF TYPICAL STRUCTURES

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

20.10.4. Example of Cage Definition................................................................................... 235

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

The following objects have been distinguished in the program:

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

 Printout - ready-to-use printout composed of views; its equivalent in the AutoCAD ©

1.2. Stages of work on structure project drawings

2. Assigning positions to structure elements

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

All operations are performed in edition layouts.

4. Defining (editing) views/projections

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

All operations are performed in printout layouts.

1.3. Options available in the menu

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

Bent plate The option enables bending an indicated plate.

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

Copy weld The option enables copying selected welds.

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

Remove bolts The option enables removing bolts.

Copy connection The option enables copying a selected connection.

Update The option enables updating selected connections after modifications in

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

Bracing The option allows definition of a parametric structure – a bracing.

Brace The option allows definition of a parametric structure – a brace.

Stairs The option allows definition of a parametric structure – stairs.

Staircase The option allows definition of a parametric structure – a staircase.

Railing The option allows definition of a parametric structure – the railing.

Ladder The option allows definition of a parametric structure – the ladder.

Cage The option allows definition of a parametric structure – the cage.

Purlin spreading The option allows defining a distribution of purlins.

Grate spreading The option allows defining a distribution of grates.

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

Delete printout The option enables deleting an indicated printout.

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

1.4. Divide project (distributed work)

To start distributed work, the user needs:

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

The following parameters may be determined in this dialog box:

The following parameters may be determined in this dialog box:

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

2.1.4. Material database

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

 select a material type in the left panel

– pressing this icon deletes a selected profile database

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

Moreover, for bolts it is possible to:

2.1.9. Project Info

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved

© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved